BID DOCUMENTS HWR RAS PIPING, PUMPS, AND MCC …€¦ · commodity hwr ras piping, pumps and mcc replacement bid # 10-20 for your bid to be considered, it must be submitted on this

BID DOCUMENTS

HWR RAS PIPING, PUMPS, AND MCC REPLACEMENT

Issued for Bid

Technical Specifications and Drawings

HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL CITY OF HOPEWELL, VIRGINIA

HWR - IFB # 10-20

HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL, CITY OF HOPEWELL, VIRGINIAHWR RAS, PIPING, AND MCC REPLACEMENT

INVITATION FOR BIDADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, STATE CORPORATION COMMISSION FORM, GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS, INSURANCE COVERAGES AND LIMITS REQUIRED, AND SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

C-200 MODIFIED INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS C-410 BID FORM

AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTSC-510 NOTICE OF AWARD C-520 MODIFIED AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED C-610 PERFORMANCE BONDC-615 PAYMENT BOND

INSURANCE CERTIFICATESC-700 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTC-800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

VA 811 NOTIFICATIONC-620 CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENTC-940 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVEC-941 CHANGE ORDER C-942 FIELD ORDER C-625 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

011000 SUMMARY011200 SPECIAL CONDITIONS012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

024116 DEMOLITION

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

DIVISION 00 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SEPTEMBER 2019 TOC-1 PROJECT NO. 18.08502

HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL, CITY OF HOPEWELL, VIRGINIAHWR RAS, PIPING, AND MCC REPLACEMENT

099000 PAINTING

113090 SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS116300 REFRIGERATED COMPOSITE SAMPLER

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260548.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260591 INTEGRATED POWER ASSEMBLY262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS262416 PANELBOARDS262419 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS262726 WIRING DEVICES262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

332700 SANITARY SEWER PIPE AND APPURTENANCES332735 EXPOSED PIPING

409100 PRIMARY PROCESS MEASUREMENT DEVICES

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS CONTROL

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SEPTEMBER 2019 TOC-2 PROJECT NO. 18.08502

Page 1 of 14

CITY OF HOPEWELL HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL

INVITATION FOR BID

HWR RAS PIPING, PUMPS AND MCC REPLACEMENT

BID: # 10-20 DATE: November 7, 2019

Sealed Bids, subject to the general conditions and specifications hereby attached, will be received at the Office of the City Clerk, Second Floor, Municipal Building, 300 North Main Street, Hopewell, Virginia 23860 until, but not later than 11:00 a.m. THURSDAY, DECEMBER 5, 2019 and then publicly opened in the Council Chambers, Municipal Building, 300 North Main Street, Hopewell, Virginia on the aforementioned date and time for furnishing the solicited supplies or services.

1. All bids must be submitted in a sealed envelope.

2. Regardless of delivery method of bid, the outside of each envelope must clearly indicate the following: (if bid is delivered by Federal Express, UPS, USPS Priority, etc. or any other means, the outside of each envelope must also clearly indicate):

Office of the City Clerk Second Floor

Municipal Building 300 North Main Street

Hopewell, Virginia 23860 Closing Date of Bid: December 5, 2019

Commodity HWR RAS Piping, Pumps and MCC Replacement Bid # 10-20

FOR YOUR BID TO BE CONSIDERED, IT MUST BE SUBMITTED ON THIS INVITATION FOR BID IN THE PLACES PROVIDED. BIDDERS SHALL SIGN THIS FORM (PAGE 3) WITHOUT DETACHING FROM REST OF BID AND MUST RETURN BID IN ITS ENTIRETY.

ANY BID RECEIVED AFTER THE ANNOUNCED TIME AND DATE OF OPENING, WHETHER BY MAIL OR OTHERWISE, WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED AND WILL BE RETURNED UNOPENED.

The right is reserved to reject any or all Bids submitted and also to place the order where it appears it will be to the best interest of the city. All quoted prices shall be FOB locations.

If you desire not to bid on this invitation, please forward your acknowledgement of NO BID. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS REQUIREMENT WILL BE CAUSE FOR REMOVAL OF YOUR COMPANY'S

Page 2 of 14

NAME FROM THE BID LIST.

The right is reserved to extend this contract, to be mutually negotiated at a reasonable time prior to the expiration date; same to be agreeable to both buyer and seller.

All bid quotations are subject to general terms and conditions hereby attached and will be rejected if not properly executed.

Individual contractors must provide their social security numbers and other types of firms must provide their federal employer identification numbers in the payment clauses to be included in contracts.

Quantities indicated herein are estimates of anticipated usage. It is understood and agreed to between the parties of a resulting contract that the City may increase or decrease quantities at the quoted price. Furthermore, it is agreed to between the parties of a resulting contract that the City shall not be obligated to purchase or pay for materials by such contract unless and until they are ordered and delivered.

The City reserves the right to be sole judge and to make the award in accordance with its own judgement as to what will best meet its requirements and be in the best interest of the City.

AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS: It is understood and agreed between the Bidder and the City that the City shall be bound hereunder only to the extent of the funds available or which may hereafter become available for the purpose of this quotation or agreement.

WITHDRAWAL OF BID: No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the date of bid opening unless the bidder has made a clerical error. The bidder shall give notice in writing of his claim of right to withdraw his bid within two (2) business days after the conclusion of the bid opening procedure and shall submit original work papers substantiating the error with such notice. The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive all informalities, and to reject any or all items of any bid.

Bidding and contracting procedure shall conform to all applicable regulations and provisions of the City of Hopewell Procurement Ordinance effective July 11, 2017; as amended; a copy of which is available on the City’s website (www.hopewellva.gov) under the tab GOVERNMENT, section LAWS/ORDINANCES. Click the link at the bottom of the page and click Chapter 1A-Procurement to view the Procurement Ordianance.

Glenise Evans Purchasing Agent

http://www.hopewellva.gov/

Page 3 of 14

Please return the bids to the Office of the City Clerk, Second Floor, Municipal Building, 300 North Main Street, Hopewell, Virginia 23860. Regardless of delivery method of bid, the outside of each envelope must clearly indicate the following: (if bid is delivered by Federal Express, UPS, USPS Priority, etc. or any other means, the outside of each envelope must also clearly indicate):

Office of the City Clerk Second Floor

Municipal Building 300 North Main Street

Hopewell, Virginia 23860 Closing Date of Bid: December 5, 2019

Commodity Name: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps and MCC Replacement Bid # 10-20

In compliance with Invitation for Bid # 10-20 and subject to all conditions thereof and attached thereto, the undersigned offers and agrees if the Bid price and conditions will be accepted within sixty (60) calendar days from the date of opening to evaluate, to furnish any and all of the items upon which the prices are quoted, at the price set opposite each item, delivered at the points as specified and as scheduled.

NAME OF ORGANIZATION TELEPHONE NUMBER

STREET ADDRESS FAX NUMBER

CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE EMAIL ADDRESS

NAME (TYPE OR PRINT) OFFICIAL TITLE

SIGNATURE DATE

VA CORPORATION COMMISSION ID# IRS I.D. #

Page 4 of 14

VIRGINIA STATE CORPORATION COMMISSION FORM: The Bidder shall submit the State Corporation Commission Form (located on page 5) with their qualification statement. If this SCC form is not included, the Bidder will not be permitted to submit a bid for the forthcoming Invitation to Bid (IFB).

PLEASE NOTE: If a Bidder is organized as a stock or nonstock corporation, limited liability company, business trust, or limited partnership or registered as a registered limited liability partnership, the Bidder must be authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth of Virginia as a domestic or foreign business entity. The Bidder must have an active Virginia State Corporation Commission Identification number.

Page 5 of 14

State Corporation Commission Form

Virginia State Corporation Commission (“SCC”) registration information:

The undersigned Bidder:

is a corporation or other business entity with the following SCC identification number: -OR-

is not a corporation, limited liability company, limited partnership, registered limited liability partnership, or business trust -OR-

is an out-of-state business entity that does not regularly and continuously maintain as part of its ordinary and customary business any employees, agents, offices, facilities, or inventories in Virginia (not counting any employees or agents in Virginia who merely solicit orders that require acceptance outside Virginia before they become contracts, and not counting any incidental presence of the Bidder in Virginia that is needed in order to assemble, maintain, and repair goods in accordance with the contracts by which such goods were sold and shipped into Virginia from bidder’s out- of-state location) -OR-

is an out-of-state business entity that is including with this bid an opinion of legal counsel which accurately and completely discloses the undersigned Bidder’s current contacts with Virginia and describes why those contacts do not constitute the transaction of business in Virginia within the meaning of § 13.1-757 or other similar provisions in Titles 13.1 or 50 of the Code of Virginia.

**NOTE** >> Check the following box if you have not completed any of the foregoing options but currently have pending before the SCC an application for authority to transact business in the Commonwealth of Virginia and wish to be considered for a waiver to allow you to submit the SCC identification number after the due date for proposals (the City reserves the right to determine in its sole discretion whether to allow such waiver):

Signature: Date:

Name: Print

Title:

Name of Firm:

Page 6 of 14

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

A. APPLICABLE LAWS AND COURTS: This solicitation and any resulting contract shall be governed in all respects by the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia and the City of Hopewell, Virginia; any litigation with respect thereto shall be brought in the courts of the City. The contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations.

B. EMPLOYMENT DISCRIMINATION/DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE BY CONTRACTOR: By submitting the bids/proposals, the bidders/offerors certify to the City that they will conform to the provisions of the Federal Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, as well as the Virginia Fair Employment Contracting Act of 1975, as amended, where applicable, the Virginians With Disabilities Act, the Americans With Disabilities Act and §2.2-4311 of the Virginia Public Procurement Act. If the award is made to a faith-based organization, the organization shall not discriminate against any recipient of goods, services, or disbursements made pursuant to the contract on the basis of the recipient's religion, religious belief, refusal to participate in a religious practice, or on the basis of race, age, color, gender or national origin and shall be subject to the same rules as other organizations that contract with the City to account for the use of the funds provided; however, if the faith-based organization segregates public funds into separate accounts, only the accounts and programs funded with public funds shall be subject to audit by the City. (Code of Virginia, § 2.2-4343.1E).

Every contract over Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000) shall include the provisions below. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

1. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the contractor. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this non-discrimination clause.

2. The contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will state that such contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

3. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting these requirements of this section.

4. To provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor’s employees.

5. To post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement

notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor’s workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.

6. To state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor

Page 7 of 14

that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace.

For the purposes of this section, “drug-free workplace” means a site for the performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.

The contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 in every subcontract or purchase order over Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000) so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

C. DIRECT TAXES: All bids/proposals shall be submitted exclusive of direct Federal, State, and local

taxes. However, if the bidder/offer or believes that certain taxes are properly payable by the City, he may list such taxes separately in each case directly below the respective item bid/proposal price. Tax exemption certification will be furnished on request.

D. INDEMNITY: The contractor agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless, the City of Hopewell and

its members, officers, directors, employees, agents, and representatives from and against any and all claims, damages, demands, losses, costs and expenses, including attorney’s fees, and any other losses of any kind or nature whatsoever including claims for bodily injuries, illness, disease, or death and physical property loss or damage in favor of contractor, its sub-contractors, their employees, agents, and third parties arising during the performance of services and resulting from tort, strict liability, or negligent acts or omissions of contractor, its sub-contractors and their employees or agents under the agreement, or resulting from breaches of contract, whatever by statue or otherwise. Each contractor shall assume the responsibility for damage to or loss of its material, equipment or facilities located at the site and, in order to effect this limitation of liability, the contractor agrees to insure or self-insure such property against any such risk.

E. SALES TAXES: The City is exempt from payment of State sales and use tax on all tangible personal property purchased or leased for its use or consumption. Certificate of Exemption will be furnished upon request.

F. QUOTATION FORM: The bidder/offeror must sign and properly fill out all forms in this Bid/Proposal

or be subject to being declared unresponsive. If unable to submit a Bid/Proposal, please sign and return this solicitation form, advising reason for no Bid/Proposal.

G. CONTRACTOR’S DEFAULT: In case of default of the contractor, the City may procure the articles of

service from other sources and hold the contractor responsible for any excess cost incurred thereafter.

H. COMPUTATION OF TIME FOR DISCOUNTS: Time in connection with discount offered, will be computed from date of delivery of the supplies or materials to carrier when final inspection and acceptance are at those points or from date correct invoice is received if latter is later than the date of delivery.

Page 8 of 14

I. ETHICS IN PUBLIC CONTRACTING: By submitting the bids/proposals, the bidders/offerors certify that the bids/proposals are made without collusion or fraud and that they have not offered or received any kickbacks or inducements from any other bidder/offeror, supplier, manufacturer or subcontractor in connection with the bid/proposal, and that they have not conferred on any public employee having official responsibility for this procurement transaction any payment, loan, subscription, advance, deposit of money, services or anything of more than nominal value, present or promised, unless consideration of substantially equal or greater value was exchanged.

J. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTIONS: In the event any governmental restrictions may be imposed which would necessitate alteration of the materials, quality, workmanship, or performance of the items offered in this Bid/Proposal prior to their delivery, it shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder/offeror to notify this office at once, indicating in his letter the specific regulation which requires such alterations. The City reserves the right to accept any such alterations, including any price adjustments occasioned thereby, or to cancel the contract.

K. IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By entering into a written contract

with the City of Hopewell, the Contractor certifies that the Contractor does not, and shall not during the performance of the contract for goods and services in the City, knowingly employ an unauthorized alien as defined in the federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986.

L. DEBARMENT STATUS: By submitting the bids/proposals, the bidders/offerors certify that they are

not currently debarred by the Commonwealth of Virginia from submitting bids or proposals on contracts for the type of goods and/or services covered by this solicitation, nor are they an agent of any person or entity that is currently so debarred.

M. ANTITRUST: By entering into a contract, the contractor conveys, sells, assigns, and transfers to the

City of Hopewell, Virginia all rights, title and interest in and to all causes of action it may now have or hereafter acquire under the antitrust laws of the United States and the Commonwealth of Virginia, relating to the particular goods or services purchased or acquired by the City of Hopewell, Virginia under said contract.

N. PAYMENT: Payment by the City is due thirty days (30) after delivery is made to the City of Hopewell

and inspection unless otherwise specifically provided: subject to any discounts allowed.

To Prime Contractor:

Invoices for items ordered, delivered and accepted shall be submitted by the contractor directly to the payment address shown on the purchase order/contract. All invoices shall show the contract number and/or purchase order number, social security number (for individual contractors) or the federal employer identification number (for proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations).

All goods or services provided under this contract or purchase order, that are to be paid for with public funds, shall be billed by the contractor at the contract price, regardless of which public agency is being billed.

Page 9 of 14

The following shall be deemed to be the date of payment: the date of postmark in all cases where payment is made by mail, or the date of offset when offset proceedings have been instituted as authorized.

Unreasonable Charges: Under certain emergency procurements and for most time and material purchases, final job costs cannot be accurately determined at the time orders are placed. In such cases, contractors should be put on notice that final payment in full is contingent on a determination of reasonableness with respect to all invoiced charges. Charges, which appear to be unreasonable, will be researched and challenged, and that portion of the invoice held in abeyance until a settlement can be reached. Upon determining that invoiced charges are not reasonable, the City shall promptly notify the contractor, in writing, as to those charges, which it considers unreasonable, and the basis for the determination. A contractor may not institute legal action unless a settlement cannot be reached within thirty (30) days of notification.

To Subcontractors:

A contractor awarded a contract under this solicitation is hereby obligated:

1. To pay the subcontractor(s) within seven (7) days of the contractor’s receipt of payment from the City for the proportionate share of the payment received for work performed by the subcontractor(s) under the contract; or

2. To notify the City and the subcontractor(s), in writing, of the contractor’s intention to withhold

payment and the reason.

3. The contractor is obligated to pay the subcontractor(s) interest at the rate of one percent per month (unless otherwise provided under the terms of the contract) on all amounts owed by the contractor that remain unpaid seven (7) days following receipt of payment from the City, except for amounts withheld as stated in (2) above. The date of mailing of any payment by U. S. Mail is deemed to be payment to the addressee. These provisions apply to each sub-tier contractor performing under the primary contract. A contractor’s obligation to pay an interest charge to a subcontractor may not be construed to be an obligation of the City.

O. PRECEDENCE OF TERMS: Paragraphs A-N of these General Terms and Conditions shall apply in

all instances. In the event there is a conflict between any of the other General Terms and Conditions and any Special Terms and Conditions in this solicitation, the Special Terms and Conditions shall apply.

P. TESTING AND INSPECTION: The City reserves the right to conduct any test/inspection it may deem

advisable to assure goods and services conform to the specifications.

Q. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: A contract shall not be assignable by the contractor in whole or in part without the written consent of the City.

R. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT: Changes can be made to the contract in any of the following

Page 10 of 14

ways:

1. The parties may agree in writing to modify the scope of the contract. An increase or decrease in the price of the contract resulting from such modification shall be agreed to by the parties as a part of their written agreement to modify the scope of the contract.

2. The Purchasing Department may order changes within the general scope of the contract at any time

by written notice to the contractor. Changes within the scope of the contract include, but are not limited to, things such as services to be performed, the method of packing or shipment, and the place of delivery or installation. The contractor shall comply with the notice upon receipt. The contractor shall be compensated for any additional costs incurred as the result of such order and shall give the Purchasing Department a credit for any savings. Said compensation shall be determined by one of the following methods:

a. By mutual agreement between the parties in writing; or

b. By agreeing upon a unit price or using a unit price set forth in the contract, if the work to be done can be expressed in units, and the contractor accounts for the number of units of work performed, subject to the Purchasing Department’s right to audit the contractor’s records and/or to determine the correct number of units independently; or

c. By ordering the contractor to proceed with the work and keep a record of all costs incurred and savings realized. A markup for overhead and profit may be allowed if provided by the contract. The same markup shall be used for determining a decrease in price as the result of savings realized. The contractor shall present the Purchasing Department with all vouchers and records of expenses incurred and savings realized. The Purchasing Department shall have the right to audit the records of the contractor, as it deems necessary to determine costs or savings. Any claim for an adjustment in price under this provision must be asserted by written notice to the Purchasing Department within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt of the written order from the Purchasing Department. If the parties fail to agree on an amount of adjustment, the question of an increase or decrease in the contract price or time for performance shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures for resolving disputes provided by the Disputes Clause of this contract or, if there is none, in accordance with the disputes provisions of the Virginia Public Procurement Act. Neither the existence of a claim nor a dispute resolution process, litigation or any other provision of this contract shall excuse the contractor from promptly complying with the changes ordered by the Purchasing Department or with the performance of the contract generally.

S. DEFAULT: In case of failure to deliver goods or services in accordance with the contract terms and

conditions, the City, after due oral or written notice, may procure them from other sources and hold the contractor responsible for any resulting additional purchase and administrative costs. This remedy shall be in addition to any other remedies, which the City may have.

Page 11 of 14

T. AUTHORIZATION TO CONDUCT BUSINESS IN THE COMMONWEALTH: A contractor organized as a stock or non-stock corporation, limited liability company, business trust, or limited partnership or registered as a registered limited liability partnership shall be authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as a domestic or foreign business entity if so required by Title 13.1 or Title 50 of the Code of Virginia or as otherwise required by law. Any business entity described above that enters into a contract with the City pursuant to the Virginia Public Procurement Act shall not allow its existence to lapse or its certificate of authority or registration to transact business in the Commonwealth, if so required under Title 13.1 or Title 50, to be revoked or cancelled at any time during the term of the contract. The City may void any contract with a business entity if the business entity fails to remain in compliance with the provisions of this section.

U. INSURANCE: The contractor shall secure and maintain in force, at his/her own expense all required forms of insurance and payment bonds to insure the completion for the work under contract to the satisfaction of the City and without damage to, or claims against the City. The contractor shall provide satisfactory evidence of bonds and insurance on behalf of the sub-contractors, before entering into an agreement to sublet any part of the work to be done under this contract.

The following performance and payment bonds and forms of insurance shall be secured by the contractor to cover all work under contract and to protect the contractor, the City, and general public against any damage of claims in connections with the performance of the contract. The bonds and insurance shall be by companies duly authorized to do business in the State of Virginia. Certificates of Insurance, naming the City as an additional insured for each type of coverage shall be required.

At the discretion of the purchasing agent, bidders/offerors may be required to submit with their bid/proposal a bid/proposal bond, or a certified check, in an amount to be determined by the purchasing agent, which shall be forfeited to the City as liquidated damage upon the bidder's/offeror’s failure to execute a contract awarded to him/her or upon the bidder's/offeror’s failure to furnish any required performance or payment bonds in connection with a contract awarded to him/her.

At the discretion of the purchasing agent, the winning contractor(s) may be required to submit a performance and payment bond to the City which shall be evoked upon contractor’s failure to execute a contract awarded or the failure to satisfactorily complete work for which a contract or purchase order was awarded. Performance bond and payment bond in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of contract price is required as security of contract, or security for payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing materials in connection with the contract, and protecting the City from all damages or claims resulting from, or in connection with the performance of the contract or purchase order.

The performance bond and payment bond shall and does bind the surety company to protect the City from damages, claims or costs by failure of the contractor to make corrective action due to his financial solvency or for any other cause whatever.

Page 12 of 14

INSURANCE COVERAGES AND LIMITS REQUIRED:

1. Worker's Compensation - Statutory requirements and benefits; require that the City of Hopewell, Virginia be added as an additional named insured on contractor’s policy.

2. Employers Liability - $500,000.

3. Comprehensive general liability for bodily injury liability and property damage liability shall be

provided as to limits specified.

4. Contractor’s protective liability shall be provided for bodily injury liability and property damage liability.

5. Fire and extended coverage shall be provided on the completed builder risk form if specified in bid

specifications.

6. The contractor shall require each of his subcontractors to carry Workmen’s Compensation Insurance and public liability and property damages liability.

7. Commercial General Liability - $1,000,000 combined single limit. The City of Hopewell, Virginia is

to be named as an additional named insured with respect to the services being procured. This coverage is to include Products and Completed Operations Coverage.

8. Automobile Liability – bodily injury and property damage shall be provided as to limits set forth in

the specifications.

The contractor shall have executed and delivered to the City copies of all insurance certificates.

Executed copies of the performance bond shall become a part of all copies of the contract.

SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

A. ADVERTISING: In the event a contract is awarded for supplies, equipment, or services resulting from

this bid/proposal, no indication of such sales or services to the City of Hopewell, Virginia will be used in product literature or advertising. The contractor shall not state in any of its advertising or product literature that the City of Hopewell, Virginia or any department or institution of the City has purchased or uses its products or services.

B. AUDIT: The contractor shall retain all books, records, and other documents relative to this contract for

five (5) years after final payment, or until audited by the City of Hopewell, whichever is sooner. The agency, its authorized agents, and/or state auditors shall have full access to and the right to examine any of said materials during said period.

Page 13 of 14

C. AWARD OF CONTRACT: An award will be made to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder/offeror. Evaluation will be based on net prices. Unit prices, extensions and grand total must be shown. In case of arithmetic errors, the unit price will govern. If cash discount for prompt payment is offered, it must be clearly shown in the space provided. Discounts for prompt payment will not be considered in making awards. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids/proposals in whole or in part, to waive any informality, and to delete items prior to making an award.

D. BID/PROPOSAL ACCEPTANCE PERIOD: Any bid/proposal in response to this solicitation shall be

valid for 60 days. At the end of the 60 days the bid/proposal may be withdrawn at the written request of the bidder/offeror. If the bid/proposal is not withdrawn at that time it remains in effect until an award is made or the solicitation is canceled.

E. CANCELLATION OF CONTRACT: The Purchasing Department reserves the right to cancel and

terminate any resulting contract, in part or in whole, without penalty, upon 30 days written notice to the contractor. In the event the initial contract period is for more than 12 months, the resulting contract may be terminated by either party, without penalty, after the initial 12 months of the contract period upon 30 days written notice to the other party. Any contract cancellation notice shall not relieve the contractor of the obligation to deliver and/or perform on all outstanding orders issued prior to the effective date of cancellation.

F. EXTRA CHARGES NOT ALLOWED: The bid/proposal price shall be for complete installation ready

for the City’s use, and shall include all applicable freight and installation charges; extra charges will not be allowed.

G. MINORITY/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESSES SUBCONTRACTING AND REPORTING: Where

it is practicable for any portion of the awarded contract to be subcontracted to other suppliers, the contractor is encouraged to offer such business to minority and/or women-owned businesses. Names of firms may be available from the buyer and/or from the Division of Purchases and Supply. When such business has been subcontracted to these firms and upon completion of the contract, the contractor agrees to furnish the purchasing office the following information: name of firm, phone number, total dollar amount subcontracted and type of product/service provided.

H. PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS/PROPOSALS: Bids/proposals must give the full

business address of the bidder/offeror and be signed by him/her with his/her usual signature. Bids/proposals by partnerships must furnish the full name of all partners and must be signed in the partnership name by one of the members of the partnership or any authorized representative, followed by the designation of the person signing. Bids/proposals by corporations must be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the State in which it is incorporated and by the signature and designation of the president, secretary, or other person authorized to bind it in the matter. The name of each person signing shall also be typed or printed below the signature. A bid/proposal by a person, who affixes to the signature the word “President,” “Secretary,” “Agent” or other designation without disclosing the principal, may be held to be the bid/proposal of the individual signing. When requested by the City, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing in behalf of the

Page 14 of 14

corporation shall be furnished.

I. WITHDRAWAL OR MODIFICATION OF BIDS/PROPOSALS: Bids/proposals may be withdrawn or modified by written notice received from bidders/offerors prior to the deadline fixed for bid/proposal receipt. The withdrawal or modification may be made by the person signing the bid/proposal or by an individual(s) who is authorized by him on the face of the bid/proposal. Written modifications may be made on the bid/proposal form itself, on the envelope in which the bid/proposal is enclosed, or on a separate document. Written modifications, whether the original is delivered, or transmitted by facsimile, must be signed by the person making the modification or withdrawal.

J. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS/PROPOSALS: It is the responsibility of the bidder/offeror to

assure that his bid/proposal is delivered to the place designated for receipt of bids/proposals and prior to the time set for receipt of bids/proposals. Bids/proposals received after the time designated for receipt of bids/proposals will not be considered. Bids/proposals will be opened at the time and place stated in the advertisement, and their contents made public for the information of bidders/offerors and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. The officer or agent of the City, whose duty it is to open them, will decide when the specified time has arrived. No responsibility will be attached to any officer or agent for the premature opening of a bid/proposal not properly addressed and identified.

K. NEGOTIATION WITH THE LOWEST BIDDER: Unless all bids are cancelled or rejected, the City of Hopewell reserves the right granted by §2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia to negotiate with the lowest responsive, responsible bidder to obtain a contract price within the funds available to the agency whenever such low bid exceeds the city’s available funds. For the purpose of determining when such negotiations may take place, the term “available funds” shall mean those funds which were budgeted by the agency for this contract prior to the issuance of the written Invitation for Bids. Negotiations with the low bidder may include both modifications of the bid price and the Scope of Work/Specifications to be performed. The city shall initiate such negotiations by written notice to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder that its bid exceeds the available funds and that the agency wishes to negotiate a lower contract price. The times, places, and manner of negotiating shall be agreed to by the city and the lowest responsive, responsible bidder.

AB - 1

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID FOR

HWR RAS PIPING, PUMPS, AND MCC REPLACEMENT

CITY OF HOPEWELL, VIRGINIA

The City of Hopewell’s Hopewell Water Renewal is seeking bids from qualified companies for IFB # 10-20, HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement.

Bids must be received at the Office of the City Clerk, Second Floor, Municipal Building, 300 North Main Street, Hopewell, Virginia 23860 until, but not later than 11:00 a.m. local time on Thursday, December 5, 2019, and then will be publicly opened in the Council Chambers, Municipal Building, 300 North Main Street, Hopewell, Virginia on the aforementioned date and time for furnishing the solicited supplies or services.

THE PROJECT GENERALLY CONSISTS OF the replacement of the Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pumps and discharge header at the Hopewell Water Renewal (HWR) facility. The existing RAS system includes eight (8) self-priming pumps that transfer RAS from the secondary clarifiers to the denitrification basin. The individual flow meters, check valves, and isolation valves will be replaced for each pump. The proposed replacement header would include 20-inch, 24-inch, 30-inch, and 36-inch diameter piping and fittings and a connection to the existing 48-inch header. A temporary bypass system will be required using temporary discharge pipes connected to the existing pumps during construction. Each secondary clarifier and associated pump will be taken out of service individually and tied into the new RAS header. The Bidding Documents for the project may be examined at the following locations during normal business hours: Hopewell Water Renewal 231 Hummel Ross Road, Hopewell, Virginia McGill Associates, PA 11832 Rock Landing Drive, Suite 104, Newport News, Virginia Digital copies of Bid Documents are available for purchase at www.mcgillassociates.com for a fee of $50.00 per set. These documents may be downloaded by selecting this project from the “Bids” link and by entering Quest Project Number 6553749. For assistance and free membership registration, contact QuestCDN at (952) 233-1632 or [email protected]. Each bid shall be accompanied with a cash deposit or certified check drawn on a bank or trust company insured by the FDIC or a Bid Bond prepared on the form of Bid Bond contained in the Bidding Documents or a Surety Company’s standard form and properly executed by a corporate surety licensed under the laws of Virginia to execute such bonds. The amount of the bid bond shall be equal to five (5) percent of the total of the bid. The bid deposit shall be retained by the Owner if the successful bidder fails to execute the contract or fails to provide the required bonds, as stated above, within ten (10) days after the proper notice of award of the contract. Bidders must comply with the requirements of the Commonwealth of Virginia and be appropriately licensed as a Contractor as provided in General Statutes. Bidders are encouraged to only secure project bid documents as noted above. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer will be responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including any Addenda, obtained from any source other than the Engineer and their representative plan provider,

AB - 2

QuestCDN. Each Bidder shall be responsible for the review of all addenda for the project and shall acknowledge the addenda on the bid form. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive informalities, or to reject non-conforming, non-responsive, or conditional bids. The Owner reserves the right to award a contract to the lowest, responsive, responsible bidder or bidders, taking into consideration quality, performance and time. Interested parties are inviting to attend a non-mandatory site-visit on Thursday November 21st, 2019 at 10:00 am local time. All questions pertaining to this bid must be received in writing by the deadline. Questions should be emailed to Glenise Evans, Purchasing Agent, at [email protected]. Technical questions should be emailed to Joel Whitford, PE, Senior Project Manager, at [email protected] The deadline for questions is November 26, 2019 at 5:00 pm local time. Responses to questions will be issued via addendum.

For further procurement information regarding the above project, please contact:

Glenise Evans, Purchasing Agent Hopewell Water Renewal 231 Hummel Ross Road

Hopewell, VA 23860 Telephone: (804) 541-2215

Fax: (804) 541-2441 E-Mail: [email protected]

EQUAL OPPORTUNITY/AFFIRMATIVE ACTION EMPLOYER

EJCDC C-200 Modified Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

MODIFIED INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly by

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ______________________

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA

______________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS _______________________

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

A Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

Endorsed by

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE


Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org

Associated General Contractors of America

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.


Page i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................. 1

Article 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ........................................................................................................ 1

Article 3 – Qualifications of Bidders ................................................................................................................ 2

Article 4 – Examination of Bidding Documents, Other Related Data, and Site Conditions .......................... 2

Article 5 – Bidder’s Representations ................................................................................................................ 4

Article 6 – Interpretations and Addenda ........................................................................................................... 6

Article 7 – Bid Security ..................................................................................................................................... 6

Article 8 – Contract Times ................................................................................................................................ 6

Article 9 – Liquidated Damages ....................................................................................................................... 7

Article 10 – Substitute and “Or-Equal” Items .................................................................................................. 7

Article 11 – Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others .......................................................................................... 7

Article 12 – Preparation of Bid ......................................................................................................................... 7

Article 13 – Basis of Bid; Comparison of Bids ................................................................................................ 9

Article 14 – Submittal of Bid ............................................................................................................................ 9

Article 15 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ........................................................................................... 9

Article 16 – Opening of Bids .......................................................................................................................... 10

Article 17 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ...................................................................................... 10

Article 18 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract ................................................................................ 10

Article 19 – Contract Security and Insurance ................................................................................................. 11

Article 20 – Signing of Agreement ................................................................................................................. 11

Article 21 – Retainage ..................................................................................................................................... 11

Article 22 – Commencement of Work ............................................................................................................ 11


Page 1

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the Modified General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office – The office from which the Contract Documents are to be issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered.

B. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – A business meeting one of the following criteria:

1. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) – A qualified socially and economically disadvantaged minority-owned business certified by any state and/or Federal agency.

2. Women’s Business Enterprise (WBE) – A qualified independent business at least 51% owned by a woman or women and certified by any state and/or Federal agency.

C. Unbalanced Bid - An unbalanced bid is one that meets the following criteria:

1. A mathematically unbalanced Bid is one that contains lump sum or unit bid items that do not appear to reflect reasonable actual costs. Those reasonable actual costs would include a reasonable proportionate share of the Bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and other indirect costs that the Bidder anticipates for the performance of the items in question.

2. A materially unbalanced Bid is one that produces a reasonable doubt that Award to the low Bidder, who submitted the mathematically unbalanced Bid, would result in the lowest ultimate cost to the Owner.

D. Responsible Bidder - A bidder who has demonstrated the attribute of trustworthiness, as well as quality, fitness, capacity, and experience to satisfactorily perform the work described in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office upon payment of the fee stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid. The fee is non-refundable.

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use.


Page 2

ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the qualifications of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract, and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids will not be accepted.

3.02 Bidders shall comply with all applicable laws regulating the practice of General Contracting as provided in the General Statutes of the Commonwealth of Virginia and be properly licensed as a contractor.

3.03 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, after submitting its Bid and within five (5) days of Owner’s request, Bidder shall submit (a) written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and present commitments, and (b) the following additional information:

A. Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located.

B. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable. Bidder shall be a Class A Contractor registered and in good standing with the Commonwealth of Virginia

3.04 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s representations and certifications.

ARTICLE 4 – EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE CONDITIONS

4.01 Site and Other Areas

A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site may include rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.

4.02 Existing Site Conditions

A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions

1. The Bidding Documents identify:

a. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site.

b. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).


Page 3

c. reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.

d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the Modified General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the Modified General Conditions will apply.

4. Geotechnical Report: The Bidding Documents may contain a Geotechnical Report. If included, the Geotechnical Report describes certain select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations. The Geotechnical Report is a Contract Document.

a. The conditions described in the Geotechnical Report are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the conditions described. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an independent review and analysis of the Geotechnical Report, all other Contract Documents, Technical Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential subsurface conditions are described in the Geotechnical Report.

b. Nothing in the Geotechnical Report is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices, nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.

C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or


Page 4

Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.

4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders

A. Bidder shall conduct Site visits during normal working hours and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site. The Owner may require site visits by the Bidder to be scheduled with the Owner in advance.

B. The Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions. However, on request, and to the extent the Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and submitting a Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site.

C. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs.

D. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.

4.04 Owner’s Safety Program

A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner’s Safety Program. As the General Conditions indicate, Bidders are responsible for complying with Owner’s Safety Program, if any.

4.05 Other Work at the Site

A. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.

ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents;

B. visit the Site and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;


Page 5

C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site including Underground Facilities that may be made available by the Owner and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been identified in the Contract Documents.

E. consider the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;

F. agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;

G. become aware of the general nature of any work that may be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;

H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder; and

I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work.

5.02 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.

5.03 No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein.


Page 6

ARTICLE 6 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

6.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to the Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered by either mail or approved electronic means to all parties recorded by the Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Contractor waives the right to rely on information provided by the Engineer which is not provided in writing and in the form of a formal Addendum.

6.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer.

6.03 Failure of any Bidder to receive any such Addenda shall not relieve said Bidder from any obligation under his Bid as submitted.

6.04 All addenda so issued shall become a part of the Contract Documents.

6.05 Prospective Bidders are cautioned concerning the use of a Post Office Box address as Addenda cannot be sent via overnight carrier to Post Office Boxes.

ARTICLE 7 – BID SECURITY

7.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to the Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of Bidder’s maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the form included or the standard form of the surety company) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02 of the Modified General Conditions.

7.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned as necessary. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid security of all other Bidders may be retained by Owner until the earlier of ten (10) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned as necessary.

ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACT TIMES

8.01 The number of calendar days within which, the Work is to be completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.


Page 7

ARTICLE 9 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

9.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain, completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS

10.01 The Contract for the Work, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

10.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.

ARTICLE 11 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

11.01 The Contract Documents may require the identification of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five (5) days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity if requested by Owner. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute. In which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit an acceptable substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.

11.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in the Modified General Conditions.

11.03 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.


Page 8

ARTICLE 12 – PREPARATION OF BID

12.01 The Bid Form included with the Bidding Documents shall be used and shall not be altered, contain any unauthorized additions, deletions, or conditional bids.

12.02 The Bidder shall not add any provision reserving the right to accept or reject an award, or to enter into a Contract pursuant to an award.

12.03 The Bid shall not contain irregularities of any kind which make the Bid incomplete, indefinite, or ambiguous as to its meaning.

12.04 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, and alternate item listed therein. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless specifically shown on the Bid Form

12.05 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown.

12.06 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown.

12.07 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.

12.08 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address and shall be signed by the individual.

12.09 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each of the joint venturers in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown.

12.10 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures.

12.11 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form.

12.12 Street, postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown.

12.13 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid.

12.14 Bidder’s state contractor license number shall be shown on the Bid Form.

12.15 All attachments, certifications or acknowledgements attached to the Bid shall be executed in the same manner as the Bid.


Page 9

ARTICLE 13 – BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS

13.01 Lump Sum

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form.

13.02 Base Bid with Alternates

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid for the base Bid as shown on the Bid Form and include a separate price for the alternate described in the Bidding Documents and as provided for in the Bid Schedule. The price for the alternate will be the amount added to the base Bid if Owner selects the alternate.

13.03 Bids will be compared on the basis of the lump sum Base Bid Item and the total of the Base Bid Item and the Alternate Bid Item. Either the Base Bid Item or the total of both items may be selected at the sole discretion of the Owner. The resulting Contract Bid Price will include and cover the furnishing of all materials, and the performance of all labor requisite for proper completion of all the work called for under the accompanying Contract, and in the manner set forth and described in the Contract Documents.

13.04 The lowest Bidder will be that Bidder whose Bid totals the lowest number of dollars as determined above.

ARTICLE 14 – SUBMITTAL OF BID

14.01 The Bid Form in the Bidding Documents is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security.

14.02 A sealed Bid shall be received no later than the time and date prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation for bids. The bid shall be submitted in a single (one (1)) envelope system. The envelope shall be plainly marked with the Project title, Owners name and address in the middle of the envelope and the name, address, license number, limitation and classification of Bidder in the upper left hand corner of the envelope. The envelope shall contain the Bid security, the Bid and any other required information as defined in the advertisement or invitation for bid or bid documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.”

14.03 If received prior to the designated time of opening, bids will be securely kept, sealed. Mailed bids will be treated in every respect as though filed in person and will be subject to the same requirements. Bids received subsequent to the designated time of opening will be returned to the Bidder unopened.


Page 10

ARTICLE 15 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

15.01 A Bid may be withdrawn prior to the Bid opening by the Bidder by providing an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder.

15.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 17.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.

15.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

ARTICLE 16 – OPENING OF BIDS

16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and alternate, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.

ARTICLE 17 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period.

ARTICLE 18 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids if there is a reasonable doubt that the bid will result in the lowest overall cost to the Owner even though it may be the low evaluated bid, or if it is so unbalanced as to be tantamount to allowing an advanced payment.

18.02 Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.

18.03 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest.


Page 11

18.04 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

18.05 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.

18.06 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

18.07 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid based on either the Base Bid Item or the Base Bid Item plus the Alternate Bid Item at the sole discretion of the Owner.

ARTICLE 19 – CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE

19.01 The Modified General Conditions, and as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it shall be accompanied by such bonds and insurance documentation.

ARTICLE 20 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within 10 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to Owner. The Owner shall thereafter set a time and place for a Preconstruction conference. One fully signed counterpart of the Contract Documents shall be provided to the Contractor following review from the Owner’s legal counsel.

ARTICLE 21 – RETAINAGE

21.01 Provisions concerning Contractor’s rights to deposit securities in-lieu of retainage are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 22 – COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

22.01 Upon execution and delivery of the Contract and the delivery of the required Performance and Payment Bonds and insurance certificates and policies by the Contractor to the Owner, the Contractor will be notified to proceed with the work of the Contract. The work of the Contract shall be commenced within ten (10) days following such notification or as otherwise specified in the Notice to Proceed.

22.02 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to enter upon the site of the work at least three (3) days in advance of such entrance.

EJCDC C-410 Bid Form McGill Associates Standard 00410 - 1 of 7

BID FORM

Hopewell Water Renewal, Hopewell, Virginia HWR RAS PIPING, PUMPS, AND MCC REPLACEMENT

HWR – IFB# 10-20

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Article No. Page No.

Article 1 - Bid Recipient .............................................................................................................................. 2

Article 2 - Bidder's Acknowledgements ...................................................................................................... 2

Article 3 - Bidder's Representations ............................................................................................................. 2

Article 4 - Further Representations .............................................................................................................. 3

Article 5 - Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................ 4

Article 6 - Time of Completion .................................................................................................................... 5

Article 7 - Attachments to this Bid .............................................................................................................. 5

Article 8 - Bid Submittal .............................................................................................................................. 6


ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT

This Bid is submitted to:

City of Hopewell Office of the City Clerk Second Floor, Municipal Building 300 North Main Street Hopewell, Virginia 23860

The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the date of the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data

identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged.

Addendum No. Addendum Date _ _____

B. Bidder has visited the Project Site and has become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations

that may affect cost, progress and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions

at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures, including Underground Facilities, at or contiguous to the Site which have been included as a part of the Contract Documents.

E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or accepts the consequences for not doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data


concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents.

I. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder or, if no written response was made by Engineer, that Bidder has resolved the issue to its satisfaction prior to the submittal of its Bid.

J. The Bidding Documents are sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.

K. Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in the Commonwealth of Virginia not later than the date of its execution of the Agreement.

L. Bidder has not relied upon any information provided by the Engineer except information which is part of the Bidding Documents and is in writing and in the form of a formal addendum.

M. The submission of a Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of the Bid Documents and the Instructions to Bidders, and that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – FURTHER REPRESENTATIONS

4.01 Bidder further represents that: A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual

or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation;

B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;

C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and D. Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or

over Owner.


ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID

Bidder will complete the work in accordance with the contract documents for the following price(s): LUMP SUM BASE BID Lump Sum Base Bid Price: ___________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________Dollars

(words) ($_______________________)

(numbers) ALTERNATE BID ITEMS The lump sum alternate bid amounts entered below may be considered at the time of contract award at the Owner’s discretion. The Owner reserves the right to select any combination of the Base Bid and Alternate Bid Items.

1. Alternate Bid Item – 48-Inch Pipe Replacement This alternate bid item shall be the increase in the Contract Price to replace the 48-inch section of MJ x flanged pipe in accordance with the specifications and plans.

Amount (in numbers): $_____________________

2. Alternate Bid Item – Welded Steel Pipe This alternate bid item shall be the increase or deduct (circle one) in the Contract Price to use all coated welded carbon steel pipe and fittings in accordance with the specifications and plans in lieu of ductile iron pipe and fittings.

Amount (in numbers): $_____________________

BASE BID EQUIPMENT / MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS The Bidder agrees that the Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the materials and equipment specified in the Contract Documents, and on the basis of the equipment manufacturer listed below.

SECTION EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS MANUFACTURER

113090 Self-Priming Centrifugal Pumps Gorman-Rupp

116300 Refrigerated Composite Sampler

262419 Motor Control Centers

332700 Air Release Valve

409100 Flow Meters Krohne


SUBCONTRACTORS The Bidder shall submit in writing the names of the following subcontractors, if any, proposed for the work. Subcontractors may not be changed, except at the request or with the approval of the Owner. The following schedule shall be completed by the Bidder. The bid, as submitted, is based upon the following Subcontractors:

TYPE NAME OF COMPANY TELEPHONE

NUMBER

Cast-in-Place Concrete

Electrical

Landscaping / Restoration

SCADA / Integration

ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete within 180 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the General Conditions within 210 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID

7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:

A. Required Bid security in the form of

B. List of Proposed Subcontractors

C. List of Proposed Suppliers

D. List of Project References

E. Bidder Qualification Statement (for Prime Bidder) with Supporting Data

F. Bidder Qualification Statement (for Electrical Subcontractor) with Supporting Data

G. Affidavit of Non-Collusion


ARTICLE 8 – BID SUBMITTAL

This Bid Submitted By:

If Bidder is: An Individual Name (typed or printed): __________________________________________ By: ________________________________________ (SEAL) (Individual’s signature) Doing business as: _______________________________ A Partnership Partnership Name: ______________________________________ (SEAL) By: _________________________________________ (Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): _________________________________ A Corporation Corporation Name: __________________________________________ (SEAL) State of Incorporation: _________________________________ Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability): ________________________ By: _________________________________________________________ (Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ________________________________________ Title: __________________________ (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest _____________________________________ Date of Authorization to do business in [State Where Project is Located] is _____________


A Joint Venture Name of Joint Venture: _________________________________________ First Joint Venturer Name: ______________________________________ (SEAL) By: ____________________________________________________ (Signature of first joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ Second Joint Venturer Name: ________________________________ (SEAL) By: ___________________________________________ (Signature of second joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): ____________________________________ Title: ______________________________________

(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.)

FOR ALL BIDDERS:

Address

Bidder's Business Address ____________________________

_______________________________________________________

Phone No. (____) ____-____ Fax No. (____) ____-_____

SUBMITTED on ____________________, 20____

State Contractor License No. ________________

EJCDC® C‐430, Bid Bond Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 2

BID BOND

Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

BIDDER (Name and Address): SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): BID

Bid Due Date: Description (Project Name— Include Location): HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement, Hopewell, VA BOND

Bond Number: Date: Penal sum $ (Words) (Figures) Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal)

Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney) Print Name Print Name Title Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title

Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

EJCDC® C‐430, Bid Bond Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 2 of 2

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation shall be null and void if:

3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre‐paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

EJCDC C-510 Notice of Award Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 1

Notice of Award

Date: __________________ Project: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement

Owner: City of Hopewell - Hopewell Water Renewal Owner's Contract No.:

Contract: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement Engineer's Project No.: 18.08502

Bidder:

Bidder's Address:

You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been considered. You are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for .

The Contract Price of your Contract is Dollars ($ ).

copies of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within ten (10) days of the date you receive this Notice of Award.

1. Deliver to the Owner [ ( )] fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents.

2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the Contract security [Bonds] and other documents as specified.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of the Contract Documents.

Owner By: Authorized Signature Title ACCEPTED Contractor By: Authorized Signature Title

EJCDC C-520 Modified Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price) Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

MODIFIED AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

Prepared by


and




______________________




Endorsed by



Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org









Page 1 of 7

MODIFIED AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Hopewell, Hopewell Water Renewal (“Owner”) and

(“Contractor”). Effective Date of Agreement: Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows:

The replacement of the Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pumps and discharge header at the Hopewell Water Renewal (HWR) facility. The existing RAS system includes eight (8) self-priming pumps that transfer RAS from the secondary clarifiers to the denitrification basin. The individual flow meters, check valves, and isolation valves will be replaced for each pump. The proposed replacement header would include 20-inch, 24-inch, 30-inch, and 36-inch diameter piping and fittings and a connection to the existing 48-inch header. A temporary bypass system will be required using temporary discharge pipes connected to the existing pumps during construction. Each secondary clarifier and associated pump will be taken out of service individually and tied into the new RAS header.

ARTICLE 2 – ENGINEER

2.01 The Project has been designed by McGill Associates, P.A. (Engineer), which is to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES

3.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.


Page 2 of 7

3.02 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment

A. The Work will be substantially completed within 180 calendar days, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the Modified General Conditions within 210 calendar days.

3.03 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the Modified General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner $750 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.02 above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner $1,000 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.02 above for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE

4.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraph below:

A. For lump sum work an amount equal to the percentage completed of specific items of work provided by the Contractor as a schedule of values for the Lump Sum work.

ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

5.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the Modified General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the Modified General Conditions.

5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 5.02.A.1 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the Modified General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed).


Page 3 of 7

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the Modified General Conditions.

a. 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; and

B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 95 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts as Engineer shall determine in accordance with Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the Modified General Conditions and less 100 percent of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion.

5.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the Modified General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS

6.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the following representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents.

B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Contractor has reviewed all General and Supplementary Conditions applicable to the Work.

E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and


Page 4 of 7

procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Contract Documents; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs.

F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 6.01.E above, Contractor does not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

I. The Contract Documents are sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7 – MISCELLANEOUS

7.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the Modified General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.

7.02 Assignment of Contract

A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.


Page 5 of 7

7.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

7.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.

7.05 Contractor’s Certifications

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 7.05:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract.


Page 6 of 7

ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

8.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (pages through , inclusive).

2. Performance bond (pages through , inclusive).

3. Payment bond (pages through , inclusive).

4. Other bonds (pages __ through __, inclusive).

5. Notice of Award (pages through , inclusive).

6. Modified General Conditions (pages 1 through 82, inclusive).

7. Supplementary Conditions (pages through , inclusive).

8. Specifications as identified in the table of contents of the bound Project Manual.

9. Drawings consisting of ___ sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: ___________________________________________________

10. Addenda (numbers __ through __, inclusive).

11. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):

a. Contractor’s Bid (pages __ through __, inclusive).

12. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed (pages through , inclusive).

b. Work Change Directives.

c. Change Orders.

B. The documents listed in Paragraph 8.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8.

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04 of the Modified General Conditions.


Page 7 of 7

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. Counterparts have been delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or have been identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf.

OWNER: CONTRACTOR

By: By:

Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: Attest:

Title: Title:

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

License No.:

Pre-Audit Statement: This instrument has beenpreaudited in the manner required by the LocalBudget and Fiscal Control Act as amended. Agent for service of process:

By:

Title:

Date:

Approved as to Form:

By:

Title:

Date:

EJCDC C-550 Notice to Proceed Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 1

Notice to Proceed

Date: _________________

Project: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement

Owner: City of Hopewell - Hopewell Water Renewal Owner's Contract No.:


Contractor:

Contractor's Address:

You are notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on

___________________. On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the

Contract Documents. In accordance with the Agreement, the Work will be substantially completed

within 180 calendar days, or by ______ ________. Also in accordance with the Agreement, the

Work will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with the General Conditions within

210 calendar days, for a date of Completion of ____ ___________.

CONTRACTOR OWNER

Given by:

Authorized Signature Authorized Signature

Title Title

Date Date

EJCDC® C‐610, Performance Bond

Page 1 of 3

PERFORMANCE BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

________________________ ________________________ ________________________

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):

Hopewell Water Renewal 231 Hummel Ross Road Hopewell, Virginia 23860

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Effective Date of the Agreement: ______________, 20__ Amount: Description (name and location): HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement, Hopewell, VA

BOND Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract): __________________, 20__ Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal) Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By: Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest: Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.


Page 2 of 3

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of

damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non‐performance of the Contractor.

8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.


Page 3 of 3

11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

14. Definitions

14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C‐615, Payment Bond

Page 1 of 3

PAYMENT BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address): ________________________ ________________________ ________________________

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):

Hopewell Water Renewal 231 Hummel Ross Road Hopewell, Virginia 23860

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement: ______________, 20__ Amount: $______________ Description (name and location): HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement, Hopewell, VA

BOND

Bond Number: _____________________ Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract): __________________, 20__ Amount: $______________ Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.


Page 2 of 3

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,

5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non‐

payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the

address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

6. If a notice of non‐payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to

satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non‐payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in


Page 3 of 3

the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

1. The name of the Claimant; 2. The name of the person for whom the labor

was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;

5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C‐700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.


STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C‐520, Stipulated Sum, or C‐525, Cost‐Plus, 2013 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other.

To prepare supplementary conditions that are coordinated with the General Conditions, use EJCDC’s Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C‐800, 2013 Edition). The full EJCDC Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C‐001, 2013 Edition).

Copyright © 2013:

National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794

(703) 684‐2882

www.nspe.org


1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347‐7474

www.acec.org


1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400

(800) 548‐2723

www.asce.org

The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ........................................................................................ 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ..................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6

2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7

2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ............................................................... 10

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10

4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10

4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10

4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................................................... 12

5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14

5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii

5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site....................................................................... 17

Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................. 19

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23

6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25

Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ...................................................................................... 26

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26

7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26

7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27

7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31

7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31

7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32

7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32

7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32

7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32

7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33

7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36

7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37

Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................... 38

8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38

8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39

8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................ 40

9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40

9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40

9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40

9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40

9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40

9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41

9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ..................................................................... 41

10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41

10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41

10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 42

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43

11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44

11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44

11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45

11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45

11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 46

11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47

Article 12 – Claims ....................................................................................................................... 47


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ....................................................... 48

13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48

13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50

13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52

14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52

14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53

14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set‐Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55

15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58

15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59

15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59

15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59

15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61

15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61

Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ...................................................................... 62

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ..................................................................................... 64

17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64

Article 18 – Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................... 64

18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64

18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64

18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v

18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65

18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65

18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65

18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65

18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 65

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda.

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.

8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract.

9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set‐off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.

10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer



has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material.

12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work.

13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract.

14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .

15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work.

16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work.

17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.

18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective.

20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition.

23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.



24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract‐related funds, real property, or personal property.

25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid.

27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work.

28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract.

29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start‐up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part.

31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes.

32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.

33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.

34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities.

35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.



37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights‐of‐way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work.

39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.

42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions.

43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.

44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.

45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start‐up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.



48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.



3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well‐known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.

C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer.

2.03 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and



3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work.

2.06 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project‐related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a secure Project website.

B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.

C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or



computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.

ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern.

D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations

1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,



error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents

A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.



3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier.

4.02 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.

4.03 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times.



2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.

B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.

C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions;

3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and

4. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5.

E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.

F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.



G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.

ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

5.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part



by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site;

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and

3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.



5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.

C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.

D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A;

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,



c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or

b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.

5.05 Underground Facilities

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after



becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.

E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question;

b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and

d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question.



5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and

2. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern.

E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set‐off against payments to account for the associated costs.



F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.

G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set‐off.

H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.

I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.



ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney‐in‐fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney‐in‐fact signed the accompanying bond.

C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts.

D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above.

E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work.

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions

A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions.

B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A‐VII or better.

C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is



maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self‐insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self‐insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.

F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage.

G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set‐off against payment, and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.

I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.

J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract.

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts.

2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable).

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees (by stop‐gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s compensation states).



4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).

B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:

1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees.

2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.

3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.

C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements:

1. Products and completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.

2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.

3. Broad form property damage coverage.

4. Severability of interest.

5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.

6. Personal injury coverage.

7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their equivalent.

8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent.

D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.

E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to industry‐standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies.

F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third‐party injury and property damage claims, including clean‐up costs, as a result



of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.

G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non‐contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.

H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor.

I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:

1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.

2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.

3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other insured under the policy.

4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.



6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.

6.05 Property Insurance

A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as “insureds.”

2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.

3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner‐furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures.

4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).



5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).

6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.

7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.

9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered.

10. not include a co‐insurance clause.

11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.

12. include performance/hot testing and start‐up.

13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is complete.

B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured.

C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.

D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.

F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what amount.



6.06 Waiver of Rights

A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the



policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim.

B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order, if needed.

ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.

7.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and



guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below.

1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and

4) it is not objectionable to Owner.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or‐equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or‐equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or‐equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or‐equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.



D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or‐equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or‐equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents.

E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or‐equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05.

7.05 Substitutes

A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site.

1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor.

2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.

3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,

2) be similar in substance to that specified, and

3) be suited to the same use as that specified.

b. will state:

1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times,

2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and

3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.

c. will identify:

1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and



2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.

d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense.

F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal.

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.

B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.

C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.

D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.



E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity.

F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.

G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.

I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.

J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work.

K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein.

L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.

N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier.



O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

7.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work



7.09 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.

7.10 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value‐added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

7.11 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer.

7.12 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;



2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

7.13 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or



exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

7.15 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to



provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

2. Samples:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.

b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.

5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.



8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.



D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.

7.18 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop



Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

8.01 Other Work

A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third‐party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site.

B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected.

D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.



8.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work:

1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors;

2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.

8.03 Legal Relationships

A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph.

C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set‐off against payments due to Contractor.



D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.

ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.

9.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

9.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

9.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.

B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.

C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

9.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6.

9.07 Change Orders

A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.



9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B.

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06.

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).

9.12 Safety Programs

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.

B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract.

10.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during



or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

10.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16.

B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19.

C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.

D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.



B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed.

ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order.

1. Change Orders:

a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times.

b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an



adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.

3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.

11.02 Owner‐Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.

11.04 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on



the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and 11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.

11.05 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.

11.06 Change Proposals

A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set‐off against payment due; or seek other relief under



the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.

2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.

3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.

B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.

11.07 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;

2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set‐off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set‐off;

3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters; and

4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.



B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed.

11.08 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS

12.01 Claims

A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article:

1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;

2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and

3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.

B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.

C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.

D. Mediation:

1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim



submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator.

3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one‐half of the mediator’s fees and costs.

E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.

F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.

G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.

ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

13.01 Cost of the Work

A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:

1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost‐plus‐fee, time‐and‐materials, or other cost‐based terms; or

2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set‐off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment.

B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items:

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable



thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes



other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.

D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost‐plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set‐off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.

E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

13.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.



B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:

1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

13.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph.

E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.



ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

14.01 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.

B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required:

1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work;

3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;

4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and

5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.

F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to



cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

14.03 Defective Work

A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.

B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work.

C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.

D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.

E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.

F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15.

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.

14.05 Uncovering Work

A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.



B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.

C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15.

2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective.

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set‐offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will



include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET‐OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD

15.01 Progress Payments

A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost‐based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.

B. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.

C. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:



a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.

6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set‐offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or



e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents.

D. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set‐offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:

1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set‐offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set‐off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non‐compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement;

b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;

c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred;

j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;

k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;

l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended.

2. If Owner imposes any set‐off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount



remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner.

15.03 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work.



E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above.

F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list.

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work.

2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance.

15.05 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.06 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of



inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set‐offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.

C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.

D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation,



including but not limited to set‐offs for liquidated damages and set‐offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.

15.07 Waiver of Claims

A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.

15.08 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions:

1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;

2. correct such defective Work;

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.



E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);

2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents;

3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or

4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:

1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that the Contract is terminated; and

2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.

C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.

E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses,



and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and

3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for



expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph.

ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

17.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article:

1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and

2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.

B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner or Contractor may:

1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or

3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS

18.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice.

18.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

18.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.



18.04 Limitation of Damages

A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

18.05 No Waiver

A. A party’s non‐enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.

18.06 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

18.07 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

18.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.

EJCDC C-800 Supplementary Conditions Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

Prepared by


and




______________________




Endorsed by



These Supplementary Conditions have been prepared for use with the Modified Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. C-700, 2007 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other.

Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org









Page 1

Insert supplementary conditions (if applicable).

VA 811

MEET VIRGINIA 811 Virginia 811 is the “one stop” Virginia communications center for excavators, contractors, property owners, and those planning any kind of excavation (digging) or demolition. We notify participating utilities of the upcoming excavation work, so they can locate and mark their underground facilities in advance to prevent possible damage to underground utility lines, injury, property damage and service outages.

Contacting Virginia 811 before you dig is a simple step, but one that can make your construction, planting or home improvement project safer while preventing utility outages that can be inconvenient or even dangerous for your neighbors.

In addition, notifying Virginia 811 before you dig is the LAW.

You may know us as Virginia Utility Protection Service (VUPS) or Miss Utility of Virginia. We are a non-profit organization functioning for the safety and benefit of everyone in our community. While our name has changed over time, our purpose has remained constant: To keep you, your friends and neighbors safe by helping you avoid buried power, sewer, gas, communications and water lines.

DIG WITH CARE CONTRACT VIRGINIA 811 BEFORE YOU DIG ALLOW REQUIRED TIME FOR MARKING RESPECT AND PROTECT THE MARKS

EXCAVATE CAREFULLY 1-800-552-7001

Con

trac

tor'

s A

pp

lica

tion

for

Pay

men

t N

o.A

ppli

cati

onA

ppli

cati

on D

ate:

Per

iod:

To

Fro

m (

Con

trac

tor)

:V

ia (

Eng

inee

r):

(Ow

ner)

:

Pro

ject

:C

ontr

act:

Ow

ner's

Con

trac

t No.

:C

ontr

acto

r's P

roje

ct N

o.:

Eng

inee

r's P

roje

ct N

o.:

1. O

RIG

INA

L C

ON

TR

AC

T P

RIC

E...

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

..... .

$

2. N

et c

han

ge b

y C

han

ge O

rder

s....

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.....

$

3. C

urr

ent

Con

trac

t P

rice

(L

ine

1 ±

2)...

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.. .$

4. T

OT

AL

CO

MP

LE

TE

D A

ND

ST

OR

ED

TO

DA

TE

(

Col

um

n F

tot

al o

n P

rogr

ess

Est

imat

es).

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

....

$

5. R

ET

AIN

AG

E:

a.X

Wor

k C

omp

lete

d...

......

. .$

b.

XS

tore

d M

ater

ial..

......

.....

$

c.T

otal

Ret

ain

age

(Lin

e 5.

a +

Lin

e 5.

b).

......

......

......

......

......

.$

6. A

MO

UN

T E

LIG

IBL

E T

O D

AT

E (

Lin

e 4

- L

ine

5.c)

......

......

......

......

......

. .$

7. L

ES

S P

RE

VIO

US

PA

YM

EN

TS

(L

ine

6 fr

om p

rior

Ap

pli

cati

on).

......

....

$

8. A

MO

UN

T D

UE

TH

IS A

PP

LIC

AT

ION

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

..... .

$

9. B

AL

AN

CE

TO

FIN

ISH

, PL

US

RE

TA

INA

GE

(

Col

um

n G

tot

al o

n P

rogr

ess

Est

imat

es +

Lin

e 5.

c ab

ove)

......

......

......

......

.$

Con

trac

tor'

s C

erti

fica

tion

P

aym

ent o

f:$

is

rec

omm

ende

d by

:

P

aym

ent o

f:$

is

app

rove

d by

:

Con

trac

tor

Sig

nat

ure

By:

Dat

e:

App

rove

d by

:

18.0

8502

App

rove

d C

hang

e O

rder

s

Ap

pli

cati

on F

or P

aym

ent

Ch

ange

Ord

er S

um

mar

y

McG

ill A

ssoc

iate

s

HW

R R

AS

Pip

ing,

Pum

ps, a

nd M

CC

Rep

lace

men

t

Hop

ewel

l Wat

er R

enew

al

Add

itio

nsN

umbe

rD

educ

tion

s

(Lin

e 8

or o

ther

- a

ttac

h ex

plan

atio

n of

the

othe

r am

ount

)

TO

TA

LS

(Lin

e 8

or o

ther

- a

ttac

h ex

plan

atio

n of

the

othe

r am

ount

)

(Dat

e)

Fun

ding

or

Fin

anci

ng E

ntit

y (i

f ap

plic

able

)

CH

AN

GE

OR

DE

RS

(Dat

e)

(Dat

e)(E

ngin

eer)

(Ow

ner)

NE

T C

HA

NG

E B

Y

The

und

ersi

gned

Con

trac

tor

cert

ifie

s, t

o th

e be

st o

f its

kno

wle

dge,

the

fol

low

ing:

(1)

All

prev

ious

pro

gres

s pa

ymen

ts r

ecei

ved

from

Ow

ner

on a

ccou

nt o

f W

ork

done

und

er t

he C

ontr

act

have

bee

n ap

plie

d on

acc

ount

to

disc

harg

e C

ontr

acto

r's l

egiti

mat

e ob

ligat

ions

inc

urre

d in

con

nect

ion

with

th

e W

ork

cove

red

by p

rior

App

licat

ions

for

Pay

men

t;(2

) T

itle

to a

ll W

ork,

mat

eria

ls a

nd e

quip

men

t in

corp

orat

ed i

n sa

id W

ork,

or

othe

rwis

e lis

ted

in o

r co

vere

d by

thi

s A

pplic

atio

n fo

r P

aym

ent,

will

pas

s to

Ow

ner

at ti

me

of p

aym

ent

free

and

cle

ar o

f al

l L

iens

, se

curi

ty i

nter

ests

, an

d en

cum

bran

ces

(exc

ept

such

as

are

cove

red

by a

bon

d ac

cept

able

to

Ow

ner

inde

mni

fyin

g O

wne

r ag

ains

t an

y su

ch L

iens

, se

curi

ty i

nter

est,

or e

ncum

bran

ces)

; an

d(3

) A

ll th

e W

ork

cove

red

by t

his

App

licat

ion

for

Pay

men

t is

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith t

he C

ontr

act

Doc

umen

ts

and

is n

ot d

efec

tive.

EJC

DC

® C

-620

Con

trac

tor's

App

lica

tion

for

Pay

men

t©

201

3 N

atio

nal S

ocie

ty o

f P

rofe

ssio

nal E

ngin

eers

for

EJC

DC

. A

ll r

ight

s re

serv

ed.

Pag

e 1

of 3

Pro

gres

s E

stim

ate

- L

um

p S

um

Wor

k

For

(Con

trac

t):

App

licat

ion

Num

ber:

App

licat

ion

Per

iod:

App

licat

ion

Dat

e:

BC

DM

ater

ials

Pre

sent

lyT

otal

Com

plet

ed

Bal

ance

to F

inis

h

Stor

ed (

not i

n C

or

D)

and

Sto

red

to D

ate

(B -

F)

(C +

D +

E)

From

Pre

viou

s A

pplic

atio

n (C

+D

)

Tot

als

%

(F /

B)

GE

Spec

ific

atio

n Se

ctio

n N

o.Description

Con

trac

tor'

s A

pp

lica

tion

HW

R R

AS

Pip

ing,

Pum

ps, a

nd M

CC

Rep

lace

men

t

Sche

dule

d V

alue

($)

A

Thi

s P

erio

d

FW

ork

Com

plet

ed

EJC

DC

® C

-620

Con

trac

tor's

App

licat

ion

for

Pay

men

t©

201

3 N

atio

nal S

ocie

ty o

f P

rofe

ssio

nal E

ngin

eers

for

EJC

DC

. A

ll ri

ghts

res

erve

d.P

age

2 of

3

Sto

red

Mat

eria

l Su

mm

ary

Con

trac

tor'

s A

pp

licat

ion

For

(C

ontr

act)

:A

ppli

cati

on N

umbe

r:

App

lica

tion

Per

iod:

App

lica

tion

Dat

e:

BE

G

Supp

lier

In

voic

e N

o.

Subm

itta

l No.

(w

ith

Spec

ific

atio

n Se

ctio

n N

o.)

AC

Bid

It

em

No.

Stor

age

Loc

atio

nD

escr

ipti

on o

f M

ater

ials

or

Equ

ipm

ent S

tore

d

HW

R R

AS

Pip

ing,

Pum

ps, a

nd M

CC

Rep

lace

men

t

DF

Stor

ed P

revi

ousl

yIn

corp

orat

ed in

Wor

kD

ate

Pla

ced

into

Sto

rage

(M

onth

/Yea

r)

Am

ount

($

)D

ate

(Mon

th/

Yea

r)A

mou

nt

($

)

Mat

eria

ls R

emai

ning

in

Sto

rage

($)

(D

+ E

- F

)

Am

ount

Sto

red

this

Mon

th (

$)

Subt

otal

Am

ount

C

ompl

eted

and

St

ored

to D

ate

(D +

E)

Tot

als

EJC

DC

® C

-620

Con

trac

tor's

App

lica

tion

for

Pay

men

t©

201

3 N

atio

nal S

ocie

ty o

f P

rofe

ssio

nal E

ngin

eers

for

EJC

DC

. A

ll r

ight

s re

serv

ed.

Pag

e 3

of 3

EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 1

Work Change Directive No.

Date of Issuance: Effective Date:


Owner: City of Hopewell, Hopewell Water Renewal

Owner's Contract No.:

Contract: Date of Contract:

Contractor: Engineer's Project No.: 18.08502

Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):

Item No. Description

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

Purpose for Work Change Directive:

Authorization for Work described herein to proceed on the basis of Cost of the Work due to:

Nonagreement on pricing of proposed change.

Necessity to expedite Work described herein prior to agreeing to changes on Contract Price and Contract Time.

Estimated change in Contract Price and Contract Times:

Contract Price $ (increase/decrease) Contract Time (increase/decrease) days

Recommended for Approval by Engineer: Date

Authorized for Owner by: Date

Received for Contractor by: Date

Received by Funding Agency (if applicable): Date:

EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 2 of 1

EJCDC C-941 Change Order Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 2

Change Order No.







The Contract Documents are modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description:

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES:

Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Working days Calendar days

Substantial completion (days or date): $ Ready for final payment (days or date): [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No.

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No. :

Substantial completion (days): $ Ready for final payment (days): Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial completion (days or date): $ Ready for final payment (days or date): [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: Substantial completion (days or date): $ Ready for final payment (days or date): Contract Price incorporating this Change O d

Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial completion (days or date): $ Ready for final payment (days or date):

RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED: By: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)

Date: Date: Date: Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable):

____________________________________________________________

Date:

EJCDC C-941 Change Order Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 2 of 2

Change Order Instructions

A. GENERAL INFORMATION

This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times.

Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes.

If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed.

For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a Field Order should be used.

B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM

Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.

Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after approval by both parties.

If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply.

EJCDC C-942 Field Order Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 1

Field Order No.







Attention: You are hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order issued in accordance with Modified General Conditions Paragraph 9.04.A, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If you consider that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, please notify the Engineer immediately and before proceeding with this Work.

Reference:

(Specification Section(s)) (Drawing(s) / Detail(s))

Description:

Attachments:

Engineer:

Receipt Acknowledged by Contractor: Date:

Copy to Owner

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 2

Certificate of Substantial Completion


Owner: City of Hopewell, Hopewell Water Renewal Owner's Contract No.:


This [tentative] [definitive] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:

All Work under the Contract Documents: The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial Completion

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below. A [tentative] [definitive] list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as amended as follows:

Amended Responsibilities Not Amended

Owner's Amended Responsibilities:

Contractor's Amended Responsibilities:

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 2 of 2

The following documents are attached to and made part of this Certificate:

This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Executed by Engineer Date

Accepted by Contractor Date

Accepted by Owner Date

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011000– Page 1

SECTION 011000 SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Standard General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Work restrictions.

4. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and MCC Replacement

B. (McGill Associates Project No. 18.08502)

C. Project Location: Hopewell Water Renewal

D. Owner: Hopewell Water Renewal

1. Owner's Representative: Jerry Byerly

E. Engineer: McGill Associates, PA, 11832 Rock Landing Drive, Suite 104 Newport News, Virginia 23606

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011000– Page 2

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

THE PROJECT GENERALLY CONSISTS OF the replacement of the Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pumps and discharge header at the Hopewell Water Renewal (HWR) facility. The existing RAS system includes eight (8) self-priming pumps that transfer RAS from the secondary clarifiers to the denitrification basin. The individual flow meters, check valves, and isolation valves will be replaced for each pump. The proposed replacement header would include 20-inch, 24-inch, 30-inch, and 36-inch diameter piping and fittings and a connection to the existing 48-inch header. A temporary bypass system will be required using temporary discharge pipes connected to the existing pumps during construction. Each secondary clarifier and associated pump will be taken out of service individually and tied into the new RAS header.

B. Type of Contract

Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit working hours as required by local regulations and noise ordinances. All other work on site shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Modified General Conditions.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer not less than three (3) business days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Engineer not less than 3 business days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011000– Page 3

2. Obtain Engineer's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011000– Page 4

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by common industry abbreviations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 1

SECTION 011200 SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Project generally consists of the replacement of self-priming pumps, meters, valves, piping, Motor Control Center, electrical, and all related appurtenances.

1.2 PROJECT PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE A. The Owner may retain a portion of the amount otherwise due the

Contractor. Except as provided elsewhere, the amount retained by the Owner shall be limited to the following:

1. Withholding of not more than 5% of the payment claimed until work

is 50% complete. 2. When the contract is 50% complete no further retainage shall be

withheld from periodic payments. However, the Owner may reinstate retainage (up to 5%) if they feel the work is unsatisfactory. The Owner may withhold additional retainage as necessary from periodic payments in a sum necessary to maintain total retainage of 2.5% of contract cost through the completion of the project.

3. When the work is substantially complete (operational or beneficial

occupancy), the withheld amount shall be further reduced below 5% to only that amount necessary to assure completion.

4. The Owner may accept securities negotiable without recourse,

conditions or restrictions, a release of retainage bond or an irrevocable letter of credit provided by the Contractor in lieu of all or part of the cash retainage.

B. For unit price projects, the Contractor shall use the “Unit Bid Item Summary”

form included with these specifications. C. Sales Tax Statement: When requested by the Owner, each request for

progress payment submitted by the Contractor shall include a sales tax reimbursement statement. The Contractor shall utilize the form provided with these specifications.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 2

1.3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

5. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article below to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by, or incorporated into, the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 3

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage and handling of all

materials and equipment, unless otherwise noted. All material and equipment shall be shipped to arrive at the job site on the dates indicated on the purchase order. The following information shall be supplied:

1. The contents and bill of lading, number of shipments.

2. The method of shipments.

3. The date of shipment.

4. The name of the construction project. B. Prior to shipment, all items shall be properly prepared to protect all critical

areas from the effects of weather, normal expected transport and on-site handling.

C. Items shall be tagged and marked with equipment and/or motor numbers

as per the manner stipulated in the purchase order. D. All spare parts and expendable supplies shall be properly crated, marked,

and shipped to the job site on the date specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STANDARDS A. All equipment and materials of construction described in this specification

shall meet the more stringent requirements of the applicable codes listed below:

1. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.

3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

4. AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association.

5. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction.

6. AWS - American Welding Society.

7. NEC - National Electric Code.

8. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

9. API - American Petroleum Institute.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 4

2.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. In all cases, the standards referenced within these Contract Documents shall be construed to reference the most current version, amendment or applicable replacement pertaining to the work.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All equipment shall, after installation by the Contractor, shall be inspected, tested and started up by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. The Contractor and the manufacturer’s representative shall complete the “Equipment Start-up Form” provided at the end of this section and submit the completed form to the Engineer.

B. The listing of a manufacturer in the specifications does not necessarily imply

that the manufacturer’s standard equipment meets the requirements of the specifications, but that the manufacturer listed has the capability to meet the requirements of the specifications.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.1 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Limits of Construction: The Contractor shall confine all operations and

personnel to the limits of construction as shown on the plans. There shall be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the limits of construction nor shall the workmen be allowed to travel at will through the surrounding private property.

B. Construction Superintendent: The Contractor shall place in charge of the

work a competent and reliable superintendent, who shall have the authority

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 5

to act for the Contractor and who shall be accountable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ labor and equipment sufficient to accomplish the several classes of work to full completion in the manner and time specified.

C. Site Conditions:

1. The Contractor shall maintain the work and project grounds free from rubbish, debris and waste materials during all phases of the work.

2. Immediately upon completion of the work and prior to final

acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, temporary structures, equipment, excess or waste materials and shall leave the work and project grounds in a neat and orderly condition that is satisfactory to the Engineer and Owner.

D. Right of Entry: The Engineer and his representative will at all times have

access to the work. In addition, authorized representatives and agents of any participating Federal or State agency shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records.

E. Temporary Construction Services and Facilities: The Contractor shall obtain

all necessary permits, licenses, etc. and shall pay all costs incident to the furnishing, installing and maintenance of temporary utility services and facilities required for the duration of the work.

F. Utility Coordination: The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements

with private and public utility companies to avoid any possible damage to or interruption of utility equipment or service. The Contractor shall be responsible for all inquiries concerning locations of utility lines. Repair of any damage to public or private utilities resulting from this work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

G. Construction Surveying: All work shall be constructed in accordance with

the lines, grades and elevations shown on the plans or as given by the Engineer in the field. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for maintaining alignment and grade. All principal controlling points and base lines for locating the principal components of the work together with a suitable number of benchmarks adjacent to the work will be provided by the Engineer. From this information, the Contractor shall verify benchmarks and develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction. The Contractor shall protect and safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and benchmarks at the site of the work and shall re-establish, at his own expense, any marks which are removed or destroyed due to his construction operations.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 6

H. Laying Out Work:

1. It is imperative that the Contractor work within the shown rights of way or easements at all times, unless approved otherwise by the property owner and the Engineer.

2. The Contractor shall, at his expense, provide competent engineering survey services and shall provide and maintain accurate, detailed, survey work.

3. The plans and supplementary drawings shall not be scaled, and the Contractor must verify all dimensions and elevations at the site prior to proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall also verify existing utility locations prior to purchasing materials affected by these locations.

I. Sequence of Construction: This project shall be accomplished in two phases in coordination with the Owner. Sludge Holding Tank No. 1 is ready for construction and the contractor shall begin work on that tank upon notice to proceed. After the contract work is complete on Tank 1, including functional and operational testing, the Owner will proceed with demolition work on Tank No. 2 through a separate construction contract. Contractor shall remove equipment and materials from the site as deemed necessary by the Owner to facilitate prosecution of the demolition work. It is expected that the demolition work will have a duration of approximately 3-4 weeks, however this is uncertain. Contractor shall remain off-site for the duration of the demolition work and shall not be entitled to additional compensation for any delays in the demolition work. The counting of contract work days will be suspended for the duration of the demolition project. Upon notification from the Owner, Contractor shall commence work on Tank No. 2.:

J. Safety and Health Regulations:

1. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Local Safety and Health Regulations including the Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (P.L. 91 - 596) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (P.L. 91-54).

2. The Contractor shall provide continuous, safe access to all properties, both public and private, along the project in all cases where such access will be provided by the completed facility and shall conduct his operations in such a manner that inconvenience to the property owners will be held to a minimum.

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 7

3. All chemicals used during project construction, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in conformance with instructions.

4.

K. Equipment and Material Storage: The Contractor shall plan his activities so that all materials and equipment can be stored within the project limits. There shall be no disturbance whatsoever of any areas outside the project limits without the prior approval of the Engineer.

L. Disturbed Areas: All areas disturbed as a result of the work of the Contractor

shall be restored to the original or better condition. Reasonable care shall be taken during construction to avoid damage to the Owner’s property or that of any adjacent property owner(s).

M. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for furnishing and maintaining temporary sanitary facilities during the construction period. Such facilities shall include but not be limited to, potable water supply and toilet facilities. Such facilities shall be in compliance with all applicable state and local laws, codes, and ordinances and shall be placed convenient to work stations and secluded from public observation. Once the project is completed all temporary sanitary facilities shall be removed by the Contractor.

N. Traffic Maintenance:

1. The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient warning lights, danger signals, and signs, shall provide a sufficient number of flagmen to direct the traffic and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and the safety of the public.

2. All barricades and obstructions or hazardous conditions shall be illuminated as necessary to provide for safe traffic conditions.

3. Warning and caution signs shall be posted throughout the length of any portion of the project where traffic flow is restricted.

O. Photographic Documentation:

1. General: The Contractor shall produce photographic documentation of the entire project work area prior to placing any materials or equipment on site and prior to any construction. The photographic

May 2019 Project # 18.08502 011200 - Page 8

documentation shall adequately condition and location of existing features that could be impacted as a result of construction

2. Cost: The cost for photographic documentation services shall be considered incidental to the work and shall be included in the bid. No separate payment will be made for photographic documentation.

3. Construction Photographs: Submit one (1) copy of each photographic view within seven (7) days of taking photographs.

a. Submit all photographs in digital .jpg format or as agreed upon

at the preconstruction conference. b. All photographs shall be at an image resolution of not less

than 3000 x 2000 pixels and 300 ppi. c. All photographs shall be appropriately labeled with the name

of the project, name of the contractor and date photographs were taken.

4. Video Recordings: Submit one (1) copy of each high-resolution

digital video recording within seven (7) days of recording.

a. Submit all video recordings in digital video format acceptable to Engineer as agreed upon at the preconstruction conference.

b. All video recordings shall be appropriately labeled with the name, of the project, name of the contractor and date that the video recording was performed.

5. Usage Rights: Contractor shall transfer any applicable copyright usage rights to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

6. Additional Photographs and Video Recordings: Engineer may request photographs or video recordings in addition to those required prior to construction.


April 2019 Project # 180.8052 012600 – Page 1

SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Engineer will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 15 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.


d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Engineer.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Engineer.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Engineer.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor.


1.6 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Work Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Work Change Directive. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




April, 2019 Project #18.08502 012900 – Page 1

SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative

procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. 4. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative

requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. A cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's

Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Engineer at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days prior to the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.


3. Sub-schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

4. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each element.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Engineer. c. Engineer's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Dollar value as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal contract amounts as appropriate which include separate costs for items such as shop drawings, and project closeout items such as, but not limited to demobilization, project restoration and final cleanup, furnishing Operation and Maintenance manuals, punch list activities, equipment demonstration, operator training and Project Record Documents.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.


6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place shall be proportionately applied to other line items in the Schedule of Values.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Engineer by a specific day of the month to be established at the pre-construction conference. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the specific day of the month that is established at the pre-construction conference.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided in Contract Documents.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for all work completed since the previous Application for Payment by including amounts for all work completed on the project and subtracting those quantities included on previous Applications for Payment. Include only amounts for work completed through the cut-off date established at the pre-construction conference.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.


E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment.

b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials.

c. Additional materials stored with this Application. d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this

Application. 4. Reimbursement for stored materials shall not exceed 50 percent of the

unit price bid for the associated line item or as shown in the Schedule of Values for that portion of the work, unless otherwise agreed upon by the Engineer and Owner .

F. Retainage: The Owner may retain a portion of the amount otherwise due the Contractor. Except as provided elsewhere, the amount retained by the Owner shall be limited to the following:

1. Withholding of not more than 5 percent of the payment claimed until work is 50 percent complete.

2. When the contract is 50 percent complete no further retainage shall be withheld from periodic payments. However, the Owner may reinstate retainage (up to 5 percent) if they feel the work is unsatisfactory. The Owner may withhold additional retainage as necessary from periodic payments in a sum necessary to maintain total retainage of 2.5 percent of contract cost through the completion of the project.

3. When the work is substantially complete (operational or beneficial occupancy), the withheld amount shall be further reduced below 5 percent to only that amount necessary to assure completion.

4. The Owner may accept securities negotiable without recourse, conditions or restrictions, a release of retainage bond or an irrevocable letter of credit provided by the Contractor in lieu of all or part of the cash retainage.

G. Sales Tax Statement: When requested by the Owner, each request for progress payment submitted by the Contractor shall include a sales tax reimbursement statement. The Contractor shall utilize the form provided with the Contract


Documents, or a similar form that provides the required information and certification.

H. Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Sales tax statement (as necessary) 5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule incorporating Work of

multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.

6. Products list. 7. Schedule of unit prices. 8. Submittal schedule. 9. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 10. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 11. Copies of building permits. 12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction

for performance of the Work. 13. Any other requirements described in the Modified General Conditions of

the Contract.


K. Progress Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of each Progress Application for Payment include the following:

1. Updated Schedule of Values. 2. Updated Contractor’s construction schedule. 3. Sales tax statements (as necessary). 4. Certified payroll statements (as necessary). 5. Summary of stored materials. 6. Any other requirements described in the Modified General Conditions of

the Contract.

L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

3. Any other requirements described in the Modified General Conditions of the Contract.

M. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where

required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum

(Final Adjusting Change Order issued by Engineer). 4. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens. 5. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and

similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 9. Record Documents. 10. General warranty letter. 11. Sales tax statements (as necessary). 12. Any other requirements described in the Modified General Conditions of

the Contract.






SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures.

2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

3. Coordination drawings.

4. Requests for Information (RFIs).

5. Project meetings.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI (Request for Information): Request from Contractor seeking information and clarification from the Engineer during construction.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of others to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.


The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of each of their subcontractors’ schedules. Contractor and each subcontractor shall coordinate its operations with operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately upon discovery of the need for additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name, including Owner.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.


4. Name of Engineer.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. RFI subject.

7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

10. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

11. Contractor's signature.

12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form acceptable to Engineer.

D. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals.

f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.


2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. Upon receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the log and the status of pending RFIs at all Progress or Coordination Meetings.

G. Improper or Frivolous RFI: Improper and/or Frivolous RFI’s shall be defined as RFI’s that request information that is clearly indicated on or reasonably inferable from Contract Documents.

1. Will be returned unanswered, will be removed from the Contractor’s RFI log, and the number assigned will be assigned to subsequent RFI.

2. At the Contractor’s request, after notification by Engineer that a RFI is improper or frivolous, the RFI will be processed with processing costs charged to Contractor as follows:

a. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the Engineer’s account for time spent in processing improper or frivolous RFI’s at the rate of the Engineer’s current standard hourly fee schedule for personnel and associated expenses.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Engineer will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Contractor of scheduled meeting dates and times.


2. Agenda: Engineer will prepare the meeting agenda and distribute to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Engineer will record significant discussions and agreements achieved and distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Contractor.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of the work.

4. Minutes: Engineer will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Coordination Meetings: Engineer will conduct Project Coordination meetings as necessary. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous Coordination Meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Topics for discussion at these meetings will be determined as necessary based on the status of Project.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last Coordination Meeting. Determine whether contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.


a. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Change Orders.

4. Reporting: Engineer shall record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.





SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. This section specifies the methods and requirements for the

submissions applicable to Shop drawings, Working drawings, Product data, Samples, Request for substitutions, Test procedures, and Construction and Submittal schedules. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General and Supplementary Conditions and other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to the Specification

Section, Paragraph, Drawing number, or Detail as applicable.

C. All submittals shall be submitted by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination and management of all submittals. No submittals received directly from material/equipment suppliers or subcontractors will be accepted unless otherwise agreed upon by all parties. The Engineer’s review comments and markup submittals will be returned to the Contractor who shall promptly coordinate and return the comments and markup submittals to the appropriate parties.

D. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed submittal

schedule in accordance with the Modified General Conditions.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment, and method of work shall be a described in the submittal. Submittal documents shall be edited to clearly show only those items to be included in the contract. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of submittals so that work will not be delayed. Different categories of submittals shall be scheduled so that one will not be delayed for lack of coordination or approval of another. No extensions of time will be allowed because of failure to properly schedule or manage submittals.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that

require Engineer’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals or those inferred by the work shown on the drawings or detailed in the project documents.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical

samples that do not require Engineer’s responsive action. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals.

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer

of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by

Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

E. Time/Days: Where days are referenced as a measurement of time the unit

shall be calendar days.

1.4 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of

values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action, informational.

d. Name of subcontractor, if applicable.


e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

h. Scheduled dates for installation.

i. Activity or event number from Construction Schedule.

B. Submit revised submittal schedule as necessary to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of the Contract Drawings and project specifications may be provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals only if detailed in other Sections of the Contract Documents. In cases where Engineer provides electronic copies of these documents, Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. Please refer to the Modified General Conditions for more details regarding the use of the Engineer’s digital data files.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with

performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section

concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the

same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of

the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

C. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

D. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized


because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Based on the complexity of the submittal, allow 7 to 21

days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it

in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Based on the complexity of the submittal, allow 7 to 21 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer's

consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

E. Each submittal shall be accompanied by the transmittal cover contained in

this section. The cover sheet shall be printed in a bright unique color of paper (color selected per project) and affixed to paper copies of each submittal. The information required for each submittal is contained on the cover sheet and shall be furnished for each submittal.

F. Submittal Identification Number: A unique four (4) character number shall be

assigned by the Contractor and shall be noted on the transmittal cover sheet accompanying each submittal. Submittal numbers shall have the following format:

1. The first character shall be a SD, W, S, or M, which represents Shop

Drawing Data (SD), Working Drawing (W), Sample (S), or Operating/Maintenance Manual (M).

2. The next digits shall be the specification section number.

3. The next digits shall be a three digit number (001 – 999) assigned to

sequentially number each submittal.

4. The last character is a letter, A-Z, indicating the submission, or resubmission of the same data, i.e., A – 1st submittal, B- 2nd

submittal, etc.


5. A typical submittal number would be:

SD-15800-013-A

where: SD = shop drawing

15800 = technical specification section 15800

013 = contractor’s submittal number 013

A = 1st submittal

G. Deviations: All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on submittals.

H. Paper and Electronic Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final

submittal, and unless Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for

transmittal and handling. Engineer will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial

submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval

notation from Engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies and one electronic copy in a

PDF format of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return one (1) copy.

2. All submittals shall include a copy of the specification section, with

addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, and each paragraph shall be check-marked to indicate that the submitted material is in compliance with the specification or marked to indicate requested deviations from the specified requirements. If deviations are noted and/or requested each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right with a detailed description of the deviation on a separate sheet.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of

construction and type of product or equipment.

1. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

2. As a minimum, include the following information, as applicable. Include

other information as required by the applicable product specification sections:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance or variations with specified referenced

standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.


3. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

5. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. Submit two (2) paper copies and one electronic copy in a PDF format

of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return one (1) copy.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale.

Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.

Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance and variation with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings,

submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a

check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these


characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as

accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for

quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in

individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as

Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit 2 full sets of available choices where

color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return one (1) submittal with options selected.

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Send preliminary schedule for Owner’s

approval prior to starting construction. Submit updated schedules as requested by the Owner.

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01

Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."


H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

4. Submit subcontract list in the following format:

a. Submit two (2) paper copies and one electronic copy in a PDF format,

unless otherwise indicated.

I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

J. Equipment Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on

manufacturer's letterhead certifying that the manufacturer has reviewed the Contract drawings and specifications, including all addendums, and that the equipment and related accessories included in the shop drawing submittal are suitable for installation in the applications proposed for the project. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Closeout Procedures”.

L. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for

coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.


B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Submittal Transmittal: Contractor shall include with each submittal a transmittal

form as contained at the end of this section. Include all information required by the form including Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION

A. Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear required cover sheet and

Contractor's approval and signature and will return them without action.

B. Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. The transmittal form included in this section contains a copy of the review stamp to be completed by the Engineer. The Engineer will complete the stamp for each submittal and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

C. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return

it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and

will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

F. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes.

Code 1 – FURNISH AS SUBMITTED, No Exceptions – The review indicates that the material, equipment or work method complies with the project documents. In this event the contractor may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.

Code 2 – FURNISH AS SUBMITTED, Make corrections noted – The review indicates that there are limited corrections required for the material, equipment or work method. In this event the contractor may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections.

Code 3 – NOT APPROVED (See Notes), Revise and resubmit – The review indicates that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies or other information. Except at his own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until such time as it is revised and meets the requirements of code 1 or 2.


Code 4 – NOT APPROVED, Rejected – The review indicates that the submittal does not comply with the project documents and is unacceptable for incorporation into the project. Except at his own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until such time as it is revised and meets the requirements of code 1 or 2.

Code 5 – Receipt Acknowledged – The review indicates that the material is for information purposes only and the Engineer has taken no action as none is required.

3.3 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS

A. The Engineer’s review of submittal information provided by the Contractor based

upon his review of the drawings, specifications, other project documents and proposed methods of work or information regarding materials or equipment shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the Owner or the Engineer, or by any officer or employee thereof, and the Contractor shall have no claim under the contract on the account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of “No Exceptions” or “Make Corrections Noted” shall mean that the Owner has no objection to the Contractor, upon his own responsibility, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed.

3.4 COSTS FOR REVIEW OF RESUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the completeness of each submittal and

identifying deviations from the project requirements. Any submittal that may require more than two (2) reviews by the Engineer shall be assessed a review charge for time spent in processing shop drawings at the rate of the Engineer’s current standard hourly fee schedule for personnel assigned to the shop drawing review and associated expenses. This charge, covering the cost of engineering and administration, shall be assessed against progress payments.

3.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of submittals organized by the

submittal number. Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the log and the status of pending submittals at all Progress or Coordination Meetings.

3.6 CONTRACTOR’S APPROVAL COVER SHEET

A. To be printed on a bright unique color of paper selected for this project and used to designate a Shop Drawing or Informational Submittal and permanently attached or made a part of each submittal.


CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Submittal #

McGILL ASSOCIATES, P.A.

11832 Rock Landing Dr, Suite 104 News, Virginia 23606

OWNER: HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL

ADDRESS:

231 HUMMEL ROSS ROAD HOPEWELL, VIRGINIA 23860

Date: March 12, 2019 Engineer’s Project No:

Project: HWR RAS Piping, Pumps, and

MCC Replacement

Spec. Reference:

Contractor: Drawing Reference:

TO: CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTAL NO: (Check One):

An Original Submittal

A 2nd Submittal of (original Submittal No.) A Submittal of (original Submittal No.)

ATTN: Product Data for Information Only

FROM: An O&M Submittal for Information Only

Item # Subject of Submittal / Equipment Supplier Equipment Designations(s) / Specification Section(s):

Complete Either (a) or (b) below:

(a) We have verified that the material, equipment or other information contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown (no exceptions).

(b) We have verified that the material, equipment or other information contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown, except for the following deviations (list deviations):

Notes/Comments: By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements and dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable shop drawings, equipment, trades and all Contract requirements.

Signature of Contractor’s Authorized Representative Date


3.6 ENGINEER’S APPROVAL COVER SHEET

To be attached to each submittal.


SHOP DRAWING REVIEW

ENGINEER’S REVIEW

RESPONSE REQUIRED OF CONTRACTOR

Furnish As Submitted, No Exceptions

Furnish As Submitted, Make

Corrections Noted

Not Approved (See Notes), Revise And Resubmit

Not Approved, Rejected, See Notes

Confirm

Resubmit

Receipt Acknowledged (Not subject to Engineer’s Review or Approval)

The Engineer’s review of this shop drawing is for general conformance with the design concept, contract documents, specifications and drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures there from, and does not relieve the Contractor from errors and omissions in the submittal or from the Contractor’s responsibility of addressing any deviations from the contract documents, specifications and drawings. The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating and verifying all quantities and dimensions at the jobsite, for selecting fabrication processes, for the means, methods, techniques, and sequence of construction, coordinating work with other trades, and performing all work in a safe manner. Engineer’s approval shall not relieve Contractor of its obligation to perform construction in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any approval by Engineer shall not constitute an approved change or substitution unless Contractor has previously advised Engineer in writing of such proposed change or substitution and obtained Engineers written approval of such change or substitution.

McGill Associates, P. A. By: Date:





SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and control services required by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with


requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer.

C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

H. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainty and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.



A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made either directly by the Owner or from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by the Contract documents, if such allowances are include in the Contractor’s construction contract.

3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.


B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are the Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 96 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, Contractor shall provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.


4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract


Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution Requirements."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality control services.



SECTION 017000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Cutting and patching.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures".

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Engineer for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of all structures, underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and/or Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately upon discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Contractor shall identify existing or establish benchmarks, control points, and property corners as necessary.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Engineer before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Certified Survey: Upon completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.


3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking, attachment plates, anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Engineer.

2. Allow for structure movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management”.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.


April 2019 Project #18.08502 017700– Page 1

SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.


4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools, and similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. Upon receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.


1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.


4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. As necessary, remove snow and ice to provide safe access to the work area.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances.


Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Remove labels that are not permanent.

i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

k. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

l. Clean any and all plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Leave Project clean and ready for operation.

B. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in the Modified General Conditions of this contract.


(Standard Form Attached)

CONTRACTOR’S FINAL AFFIDAVIT AND WAIVER OF LIEN

PROJECT: Return Activated Sludge Piping and Pumps Replacement

OWNER: HOPEWELL WATER RENEWAL

Hopewell Water Renewal CONTRACTOR:

CONTRACT AMOUNT:

STATE OF: Virginia CONTRACT DATE:

CITY OF: Hopewell DATE:

This is to certify that all claims for labor, material, services and any other just claims arising out of the performance of this Contract have been satisfied, except for payment to subcontractors to be made out of retainage presently being held by the Owner, and that no claims or liens exist against this Contractor in connection with this contract; that to the best of our knowledge no claims or liens exist, and if any such claims or liens appear after payment of the retained amount due on the Contract, this Contractor shall save the Owner harmless on account thereof. After payment of the retained amount the undersigned does hereby waive, release and relinquish any and all claims or rights of lien presently held or hereafter accruing upon the above project.

CONTRACTOR: BY: TITLE:

Sworn to and subscribed before me this

day of 201

(Notary Public)

My Commission expires:

September 2019 Project # 18.08502 017823 – Page 1

SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operational components of manuals for systems, subsystems, and

equipment. 3. Product maintenance components of manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section


submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file of initial submittal and final submittal. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Paper copies (for final submittal only): Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

C. Manual Submittal: Submit two (2) digital copies and three (3) paper copies of each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems.


3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each operation and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents.

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Engineer. 7. Name and contact information for Equipment Manufacturer’s

Representative. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance

manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.


1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, vinyl-covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.


3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind

with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 OPERATIONAL COMPONENTS OF MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Operating standards. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Operating logs. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Control diagrams. 7. Piped system diagrams. 8. Precautions against improper use.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions.


4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Normal shutdown instructions. 6. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 7. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 8. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

F. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

G. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENTS OF MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Material and chemical composition. 4. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.


2. Schedule for routine maintenance. 3. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENTS OF MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and

reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.


E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Product Maintenance Components of Manuals: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operational Components of Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operational data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.


D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.




SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints and one digital copy as described below.

B. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and one digital copy of each submittal as described below.

C. As-Built Survey & Drawings: Contractor shall provide an as-built survey prepared under the direction of a licensed surveyor of the installed water line before the project is eligible for a final walk-through.


1.4 PRODUCTS

A. Not used.

1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below grade.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.

i. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.

j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.


k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Change Order or Work Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Engineer. When authorized, prepare a digital copy of those Contract Drawings.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Provide information in the following formats:

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Digital Data Files on a disk: Organize digital data information into separate PDF electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Contractor.

1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual


performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit three (3) paper copies and two (2) digital copies of all miscellaneous records.

1. Include a miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

1.7 AS-BUILT SURVEY

A. Format: Submit two (2) digital copies of the as-built survey.

1. Survey file shall be prepared under the direction of a surveyor licensed in the state where the work has been performed.

2. Survey shall be provided in AutoCAD format and coordinated with the design drawings by tying the survey to the Engineer’s original survey control points.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.



SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and

equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences.

2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit three copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.



A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training for the specific equipment.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved operation and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Owner and Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation:

a. Operations and maintenance manuals. b. Project Record Documents.


c. Identification systems. d. Warranties and bonds. e. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing

commitments.

3. Emergencies:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating

limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Procedures for preventive maintenance.


c. Procedures for routine maintenance. d. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and

reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

C. Provide training materials in hard copy and electronic formats.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. Schedule training with Owner through Engineer with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.

D. Cleanup: Collect unused and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.



SECTION 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.


1. Divisions 2 through 40 Sections for specific commissioning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. Manufacturer: Generally the equipment manufacturer and/or their authorized representative.

C. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. Members Appointed by Contractor: Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate including the manufacturer.


1. Manufacturer: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Contractor will engage the manufacturer under this contract.

B. Members Appointed by Owner:

1. Representatives of the Owner that will operate and maintain the facility. 2. Engineer.

1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.

2. Cooperate with the manufacturer for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.

3. Attend commissioning team meetings held during applicable monthly progress meetings and other specially called meetings.

4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule.

5. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the manufacturer. 6. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the

manufacturer. 7. Complete commissioning process test procedures.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Organize and lead the commissioning team.

B. Provide commissioning plan.

C. Convene commissioning team meetings.

D. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.


E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with requirements. Report any failures in the Issues Log.

F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.

G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.

H. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.

I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and commissioning process report.

J. Complete the “Equipment Start-Up Form” at the end of this section.




(Standard Form Attached)

EQUIPMENT START-UP FORM

NO.

Proj. # _________________ Date: _________________

PROJECT DATA

NAME: NUMBER:

LOCATION: DATE:

OWNER: DRAWING NO.:

OTHER: SPEC. SECTION:

NAME OF EQUIPMENT CHECKED:

NAME OF MANUFACTURER OF EQUIPMENT

1. The equipment furnished by us has been checked on the job by us. We have reviewed (where applicable) the performance verification information submitted to us by the Contractor.

2. The equipment is properly installed, except for the items noted below.*

3. The equipment is operating satisfactorily, except for the items noted below.*

4. The written operating and maintenance (O&M) information (where applicable) has been presented to the Owner, and gone over with the Owner in detail. Three (3) copies of applicable O&M documents and parts lists have been furnished to Owner.

CHECKED BY:

Name of Manufacturer’s Representative Name of General Contractor

Address & Phone No. of Representative Authorized Signature/Title/Date

Signature and Title of Person Making Check Name of Subcontractor

Date Checked Authorized Signature/Title/Date

MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE Notations: Exceptions noted at the time of check were:

Manufacturer’s Representative to note adequacy of related equipment that directly affects operation, performance or function of equipment checked. (No comment presented herein will indicate adequacy of related systems or equipment.)

COPIES TO:

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

ENGINEER: FIELD:

ARCHITECT: OTHER:

JUNE 2019 Project #18.08502 024116 – Page 1

SECTION 024116 DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of structures and/or site improvements. 2. Abandoning in place or removing below-grade construction. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place or removing

site utilities. 4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.

2. Division 01 Section “Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before building demolition.

3. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction, protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition operations.

4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade site improvements not part of building demolition.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Demolish: Completely remove and legally dispose of off-site.

B. Recycle: Recovery of demolition waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

C. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.


D. Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, allow for further use, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes the property of Contractor.

B. Timber, steel and other merchantable goods and materials removed incidental to demolition shall remain the property of the Owner unless otherwise directed.

C. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit, as requested, informational report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

1. Adjacent Buildings and Property: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain and property.

B. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services.

C. Demolition Plans: Drawings indicating the following:

1. Locations of temporary protection.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.

E. Preconstruction Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with


Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before the Work begins.

F. Landfill Records: Provide receipt for the acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

G. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review and finalize demolition schedule and verify availability of

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review and finalize protection requirements. 4. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 5. Review procedures for protection of adjacent structures. 6. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner. 7. Review procedures for the disposal of hazardous waste.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Structures to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work.

B. Structures immediately adjacent to the demolition area may be occupied or otherwise in operation. Conduct demolition so operations of occupied or operating structures will not be disrupted.

1. Provide not less than three (3) business days’ notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied or operating structures.


2. Maintain access to existing roadways, walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants/operators of adjacent structures.

a. Do not close or obstruct roadways, walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants/operators of adjacent structures without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by the Contractor by way of a Change Order or by the Owner under a separate contract. If the removal of hazardous materials results in a delay to the Contractor’s schedule an appropriate adjustment will be made to the Contract Time by way of Change Order.

E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may be present in buildings and structures to be demolished. If a report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use, the Contractor may examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be demolished because of building operations or processes performed there.

F. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or the operations of adjacent occupied or operating structures.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner, if available. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs and/or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

A. As necessary, perform or engage a professional engineer properly licensed to practice in the state of the project site to perform an engineering survey of condition of structure to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during demolition operations.

B. Retain subparagraph below if demolition includes prestressed or post-tensioned concrete slabs.

1. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition.


B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off all utilities serving structures to be demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect

adjacent occupied or operating structures, then provide temporary utilities that bypass structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other structures.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 36 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

D. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

E. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner or indicated on

Drawings. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent roadways, walkways, loading docks, structure entries, and other facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing structures.

B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.


a. Provide at least 3 business days' notice to occupants/operators of affected structures if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as roadways, walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

1. Protect adjacent structures and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain.

4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent structures and facilities to remain.

5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition area and to and from occupied or operating portions of adjacent structures.

6. Protect all adjacent improvements that are to remain and that are exposed to demolition operations.

7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and dirt migration to occupied or operating portions of adjacent structures.

D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated existing structures and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame cutting operations.

3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on any part of the structure.

B. During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result from demolition activities.


C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and operating facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or operating facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed areas if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent structures or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

D. Bituminous Paved Areas: Scarify and completely remove. Resultant material may be utilized in bottom portion of areas to receive fill. No pieces shall be left exposed in the fill slopes. If material is used in any portion of the new construction, layers shall be a maximum of 8 inches and separated by minimum 6-inch layers of earth. Water and compaction requirements are specified under other sections. No compaction is required for materials used for obliteration work outside the limits of new construction.

E. Removal of Concrete Surfaces and Structures: Concrete designated for removal, break into pieces and use for rip rap. Volume, minimum 0.5 cubic feet; 75 percent of pieces shall be between 1.5 and 2.0 cubic feet. Stockpile at designated locations.

F. Pipe Removal: Remove pipe, exercising care to avoid breaking or damaging. Store pipe to be relaid as directed.

3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS

A. Proceed with demolition of structural members systematically, from higher to lower level.

B. Remove debris from elevated portions of a structure by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

1. Remove structural members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation.

C. Salvage: Items to be salvaged are indicated on Drawings.

D. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish all below-grade construction that is within the footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area.


1. Remove below-grade construction to at least 36 inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures as shown on the Drawings.

1. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory materials according to backfill requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

2. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings. 3. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and

disconnecting devices.

3.6 DEMOLITION BY EXPLOSIVES

A. Legal Requirements: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing explosives to, or using explosives on, Project site. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations pertaining to the use, storage, and handling of explosives. It is the intent of these specifications to require compliance with all current, pertinent laws and regulations. In the event of inconsistencies between these specifications and these laws and regulations, the laws and regulations shall take precedence, subject to final determination by the Engineer.

B. Protection: The Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life and property. Make proper use of blasting mats and other protective devices adopting whatever additional precautions are necessary to prevent damage to adjacent structures, property, or site improvements when using explosives. Make every effort to prevent damage to the natural and the constructed surroundings. Should damage occur, make restoration as required by the Engineer.

C. Personnel: One competent, experienced person shall be specifically designated in charge of explosives. The designated person must present certification to the Engineer that they has successfully completed a course in the handling and use of explosives, given by an accredited institution such as the U.S. Bureau of Mines, DuPont, or other explosive manufacturing company. They shall exercise careful supervision of all work related to the use, storage, and handling of explosives. Permit only a minimum number of competent, experienced persons, consistent with efficient operation, to handle explosives. Exclude any one demonstrating carelessness, incompetence, or inexperience from further handling of explosives.

D. General Requirements: The Contractor shall give special attention to the following specific rules:

1. Locate magazines in accordance with the American Table of Distances for

Storage of Explosives and only at sites approved by the Engineer.


2. Magazines shall be bulletproof, fireproof, burglarproof, weather resistant, constructed with adequate screened ventilation and dry wood floors. Countersink all nails exposed to the interior of magazines.

3. Do not store detonators with other explosives but in separate magazines. 4. Magazines shall not be provided with artificial heat or lights. 5. Securely lock magazines. 6. Mark magazines and roads in area with appropriate caution and danger

signs. 7. Clear blast area of unnecessary personnel and equipment before delivery of

any explosives to the site. 8. Keep no more than a one day supply of explosives at or near the work site.

Keep explosives in approved portable magazines in locations approved by the Engineer.

9. Use only wooden tamping bars for charging explosives into drill holes. 10. Do not use electricity from light or power circuits for firing shots unless the

electrical connection to the circuit is made within an enclosed switch box securely locked with switch in open position.

11. Provide a positive warning system to give adequate warning in every direction immediately prior to firing explosives. Guard all access points to the blast area to halt personnel and vehicles a safe distance from the blast. Maintain intercommunication between guards and person firing the blast assuring the blast area is clear prior to firing.

12. Provide special signs or signals at all access points including a warning to turn off radio transmitters whenever electrical detonators are used.

3.7 SITE RESTORATION

A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Eliminate areas where water may collect in depressions.

3.8 REPAIRS

A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent improvements caused by demolition operations.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property,


remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on

adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began.



SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes cast in place concrete as shown on Drawings, and as specified herein. In general, this work includes cast in place concrete consisting of Portland Cement, fine and course aggregate, selected admixtures, mixing, transporting, placing, finishing, and curing as herein specified. This section further includes fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement, providing formwork and shoring for this work as well as related items of quality control, testing, and evaluation of concrete strength.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Some products and execution are specified in this section by reference to published specifications or standards of the following with respect abbreviations used.

1. American Concrete Institute: ACI 2. The American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM 3. American Welding Society AWS 4. U. S. Products Standards PS

B. Standard References: The current edition of the following standard references shall apply to the work of this Section except as indicated otherwise on the Drawings or herein.

1. Publications of the American Concrete Institute:

a. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete


b. ACI 211.2 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete

c. ACI 212 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete d. ACI 214 Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete e. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete. f. ACI 304 Guide for Use of Volumetric-Measuring and Continuous-

Mixing Concrete Equipment g. ACI 305 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting h. ACI 306 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting i. ACI 308 Specification for Curing Concrete j. ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete k. ACI 311 ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection l. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. m. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. n. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

2. Publications of the American Welding Society:

a. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel

3. Publications of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:

a. Manual of Standard Practice

4. Publications of the American Society for Testing and Materials:

a. ASTM A 82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

b. ASTM A 185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

c. ASTM A 615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

d. ASTM A 996 Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.

F. Samples: For waterstops and/or vapor retarder.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.

H. Welding certificates.

I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.


J. Contractor shall submit records of all concrete pours showing exact location of pour, date of pour, quantity of pour, and class of concrete poured to the Engineer each month. Temperature at time of pour should also be recorded.

K. Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer chemical and physical analysis of all cement and fly ash delivered to the batch plant seven (7) days prior to use of the cement or fly ash.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following applicable standards unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete" 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. If the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders shows the concrete to be below the specified design strength, the aggregate proportions and water content may be changed by the Engineer, who, in addition to such changes, may require core tests. Tests confirming concrete strengths on hardened concrete which was poured without testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.

H. Prepare design mixes for each class of concrete used in accordance with ACI 311.1. The Contractor shall pay for all design mix costs. Submit written reports to the Engineer for each proposed mix for each class of concrete prior to start of


work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been approved by the Engineer.

I. Strength data for establishing standard deviation and required overstrength factor will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for two groups totaling 30 or more tests representing similar materials and project conditions. Records of these tests shall be submitted with the proposed design mix.

J. If standard deviation exceeds 800 psi or if no suitable records are available, selected proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. If standard deviations are less than 600 psi, the minimum overstrength factor required in the design mix shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 4.3.1.

K. Design mixes shall be proportioned using the maximum specified slump and temperature. Laboratory test date for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in the work. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Design mix shall be proportioned using the proposed admixtures at optimum recommended dosages. The manufacturer of the mixture shall prepare and submit test date used to determine the optimum dosage.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Reinforcing Steel shall be delivered to the Project Site properly tagged, bundled, and ready to place. Reinforcing steel delivered to the Project Site, and not immediately placed in forms, shall be protected from mud, excessive rust producing conditions, oil, grease, or distortion. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials shall be high quality and standard for the industry.


B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all reinforcing steel shall conform to one of the following ASTM Standards, latest edition:

1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2. ASTM A 996, Grade 60.


B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: Where indicated steel reinforcement shall be epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.

E. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.

F. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884, Class A, Type 1, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch wire length.

G. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from steel wire into flat sheets.

H. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

I. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884, Class A coated, Type 1, steel.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775 epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from stainless steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.


2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement shall be fresh stock of an approved standard brand meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150, of Type II, white. Only one brand of cement shall be used except when otherwise approved by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the brand name of the cement proposed for use. The Contractor shall submit a copy of mill test reports on all cement delivered to the job 7 days prior to use of the cement. Cube strength from mill tests shall have a tolerance of ±600 psi. The fineness of cement used shall not have more than 10 percent retained on a no. 325 mesh screen when tested in accordance with ASTM C 430.

2. Fly Ash shall have a high fineness and low carbon content and shall exceed the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class 7, except that the loss of ignition shall be less than 3 percent, and all fly ash shall be a classified processed material. Fly ash shall be obtained from one source for the concrete delivered to the project. Complete chemical and physical analysis of each carload of fly ash shall be submitted to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to use of each carload delivered. Concrete mixes proportioned with fly ash shall contain not less than 10 percent nor more than 20 percent by weight of cement of fly ash.

B. Concrete Aggregates: Unless otherwise specified all aggregate shall be normal weight aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 33.

1. Aggregate for concrete shall consist of clean crushed stone or gravel having hard, strong, uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter. Maximum aggregate size shall be ¾-inch. The maximum permissible percentage of elongated particles shall not exceed 5 percent by weight. Elongated particles are those defined as having a length equal to or greater than 5 times the width. Samples of coarse aggregate shall be submitted to the testing laboratory for testing and approval prior to use. The fineness modulus of the coarse aggregate shall not vary for more than ±0.3 percent.

2. Where lightweight aggregate is specified, provide aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 330.

3. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Fine Aggregate shall consist of sand, stone screening, or other inert materials with similar characteristics having clean, strong, durable, uncoated grains and free from lumps, soft or flaky particles, clay, shale, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances with reactivity to alkali in cement. Fine aggregate shall be submitted for testing and approval to the testing laboratory. The


laboratory shall verify that fine aggregate conforms to ASTM standards by making standard colormetric, sediment, and comparative tensile tests, and by sieve analysis. The fineness modules of the sand shall not vary by more than ±0.2 percent. Color shall be standard as determined from colormetric tests.

D. Water shall be potable water in accordance with ASTM C 94.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. When required or permitted, admixtures shall conform to the appropriate specification indicated. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer.

1. Air-Entraining Admixture shall be in accordance with ASTM C 260.

a. Air-entraining admixtures shall be used for all concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure. Entrained air shall conform to the air control limits of Table 3.4.1 of ACI 301. The water-cement ratio for all air-entrained concrete exposed to freezing and thawing shall not exceed 0.53.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures shall be hydroxolated polymer type in accordance with ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops shall be in accordance with CE CRD-C 572 for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints with factory-fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

a. W. R. Meadows. b. Greenstreak. c. Vinylex Corp.


2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered.

B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.

C. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Barrier shall be minimum 10 mil polyethylene film that complies with ASTM C171 and meets or exceeds test for water retention, ASTM C 156.

2.8 CRUSHED STONE FILL

A. Crushed Stone Fill shall be uniform 1-inch stone, no fines, in conformance to ASTM C 33.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Liquid curing material for concrete shall exceed the requirements of ASTM C 309, Type I. Products acceptable shall provide water retention not exceeding a loss of 0.020 grams per sq. cm. when tested at a coverage of 200 sq. ft. per gallon and tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. Submit test data verifying these requirements for approval.

B. Burlap shall be free of sizing or any substance that is injurious to cement or can cause discoloration. Burlap shall be rinsed in water prior to use. Burlap shall be sufficient thickness to retain water without requiring wetting.

C. Water: Potable.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Pre-molded Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips shall be asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or in accordance with ASTM D 1751.

B. Joint Sealing Compound shall be a two-part mineral filled epoxy polyurethane, and shall be used for all exposed joints in exterior paving slabs, sidewalks, where concrete slabs abut concrete walls, and in exposed joints in slabs on grade.


C. Surface Coating for all exposed concrete except where otherwise shown shall be "Thoroseal" as manufactured by the Standard Dry Wall Co., or an approved equal.

D. Steel for Embedded Angles and Plate Cast in Concrete shall conform to ASTM A 36. Plates and angles shall receive a commercial sand blast and be painted with an inorganic zinc base paint equal to Carbomastic #11, or an approved equal.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Concrete shall be mixed at batch plants or it may be transit mixed as specified herein. Concrete batch plants must comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94 and ACI-304 with sufficient capacity of producing concrete of the quantity and quality as specified herein. All plant facilities are subject to inspection by the Engineer. Ready-mix concrete shall comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified herein, unless otherwise noted. During hot weather or


under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 will be required as follows:

1. When air temperatures are between 80 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 1 hour

2. When outside air temperatures are above 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 45 minutes.

B. Addition of water at the site for concrete mix with insufficient slumps, slumps less than the maximum specified herein, will not be permitted. Concrete delivered to the project with slump less than the minimum or greater than the maximum specified shall be rejected and discarded off site.

C. Batch tickets for each load of concrete shall be submitted to the Engineer. The following information shall be provided on each batch ticket:

1. Design mix designation 2. Exact time cement, water and aggregate were discharged into the mix 3. Compressive strength of mix 4. Amount of water added to the mix

D. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before charging of each batch. Schedule delivery of trucks in order to prevent delay of placing after mixing.

E. Slump: All concrete shall be proportioned and produced to have a maximum slump of 4 inches and a minimum slump of 2 inches. A tolerance of up to, but not exceeding, 1 inch above the indicated maximum shall be allowed for individual batches in any one day's pour provided the average of the most recent ten batches within the same pour does not exceed the maximum limits. No tolerance will be permitted for individual batches when less than ten (10) batches are delivered for one day's pour.

F. *Concrete Type and Strengths

Location Maximum Size Aggregate

*28 Day Compressive Strength

Slabs on Grade ¾" 4000 psi

Walls ¾" 4000 psi

Columns ¾" See Notes on Plan

Beams, Supported Slabs & Joists

¾" 4000 psi

Pipe Supports ¾” 3000 psi


*Twenty-eight day strength shall be as determined from concrete sampled in accordance with ASTM C 172 and 4-inch diameter x 8–inch cylinders tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and C 39.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." All reinforcing steel shall be cut and shop fabricated and delivered to the project properly tagged, bundled and ready to place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK DESIGN

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all concrete formwork. Formwork shall be designed in accordance with ACI 347 unless otherwise noted. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

B. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressure, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. Support form facing materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent deflection. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities and within allowable tolerances. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins.

C. Formwork for foundation systems may be omitted when workmanship and soil conditions permit accurate excavation and the omission is approved by the Engineer. Provide temporary openings in wall forms, column forms, and other locations necessary to permit inspection and cleanout.


D. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in the concrete, such as ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Non-fabricated wire shall be used. Form ties shall be constructed so that the end fasteners can be removed without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After the ends or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than two diameters or twice the minimum dimensions of the tie from the formed faces of concrete to be permanently exposed to view except that in no case shall this distance be less than ¾-inches. When the formed face of the concrete is not to be permanently exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with the formed surfaces.

E. At construction joints, contact surface of the form for sheeting for flush surfaces exposed to view shall overlap the hardened concrete in the previous placement by more than one foot. The forms shall be held against the hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at the construction joint and to maintain a true surface. Wood forms for wall openings shall be constructed to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling of the forms. Wedges used for final adjustment of the forms prior to concrete placement shall be fastened in position after the final check. Formwork shall be so anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces or members that upward or lateral movement of any parts of the formwork system during concrete placement will be prevented. Runways for moving equipment or pump lines shall be provided with struts or legs and shall be supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel. When mudsills are to be placed for supporting concrete forms, a reasonably level and sufficiently compacted surface will be required. Shores shall be plumb within acceptable tolerances.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

I. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.


2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

3.2 FORMWORK TOLERENCES

A. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, formwork shall be constructed so that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in Table 4.3.1 of ACI 301.

B. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES AND FORM COATINGS

A. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign materials before concrete is placed in the forms.

B. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

C. Coat form contact surfaces with form coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide form coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion or impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply coatings in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.


3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations provided surfaces are cured and protected from cold weather as specified herein.

B. Forms and shoring in the formwork used to support the weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members, shall remain in place until the concrete has reached the minimum strength specified of 75 percent of the specified 28-day design strength. Strength of concrete must be verified by concrete test cylinders molded and cured in the field under the same conditions that the concrete represented by these cylinders are cured and/or maturity meters connected to thermo-couples embedded in the concrete. It shall be the responsibility of the concrete technician, employed by the Owner, to inform the General Contractor when the strength of concrete cured in the field has attained the minimum specified strength required for removal of the forms.

C. Bottom forms of slabs shall not be removed in less time than is indicated below unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Above 60 degrees F. 50 degrees F. 40 to 50 degrees F.

8 days 10 days 18 days

D. When temperature is below 40 degrees F., the shores shall remain in place for an additional time equal to the lower temperature.

E. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the non-load-carrying form-facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports, the facing material may be removed at an earlier age as specified or permitted. Wood forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to the concrete.

F. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at an early age, forms shall be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.

G. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

H. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.


3.6 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. When reshoring is permitted or required, the operations shall be planned in advance and shall be subject to approval. While reshoring is under way, no live load shall be permitted on the new construction.

B. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

C. In no case during reshoring shall concrete in beam, slabs, column or any other structural member be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of the loads permitted by the Engineer for the developed concrete strength at the time of reshoring. Reshores shall be placed as soon as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than the end of the working day on which stripping occurs.

D. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.8 CRUSHED STONE FILL

A. Crushed Stone Fill, 6 inches in depth, shall be placed under all concrete floors in contact with the ground. Stone shall be compacted as thoroughly as possible by tamping and rolling.

3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet the following requirements for fabrication tolerance.

Sheared Length +1”


Overall Dimension of Stirrups +1/2”

All Other Bends +1”

C. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:

Concrete Cover to Formed Surfaces +1/4”

Top Bars in Slabs +1/4”

Top Bars in Beams +1/2”

Horizontal Tolerance from Vertical Surfaces +1/4”

Vertical Bars in Columns +1/4”

Vertical and Horizontal Bars in Walls +1/2”

Lengthwise in Member +2”

Wire Fabric +1/2” from center of slab or location called for on drawings

D. Bars may be moved one bar diameter as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If the bars are moved more than one bar diameter, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval.

E. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement except for extremely corrosive atmosphere or other severe exposures shall be as follows:

Concrete deposited Against the Ground 3"

Formed Surfaces Exposed to Weather or in Contact With the Ground

2"

Interior Surfaces:

1-1/2" for Beams and Column Ties; 3/4" for Slabs

and Walls; Beam and Column Bars Shall be

Anchored Against the Ties.

F. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

G. All reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil, or other materials that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or tooth will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of


deformations, of a cleaned sample shall not be less than required by applicable ASTM Standards.

H. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement from construction loads, the placement of concrete or other anticipated loads. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

I. The Contractor shall securely maintain the steel reinforcement accurately in place until the concrete is placed. Any and all disturbances of reinforcing from any cause whatsoever shall be fully corrected prior to placing of concrete, and all damaged bar supports and spaces shall be repaired or removed and replaced. All bars shall be extended beyond stress points the development length of the bar or be provided with an equivalent development length with a hook.

J. When required or approved, welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to AWS D1.4. No welding shall be done at the bend in a bar. Welding of cross bars (tack welding) shall not be permitted except as authorized or directed by the Engineer.

K. Over formwork, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and spacers shall be furnished. When the concrete surface will be exposed to weather in the finished structure or where rust would impair architectural finishes, the portions of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be stainless steel or plastic.

L. Unless otherwise shown on the plans and details, the following accessories shall be provided for supports for all reinforcement:

1. Reinforced slabs-on-grade shall have plain precast concrete blocks sufficient to support bars within prescribed tolerances, or individual high chairs with runners to rest on soil.

2. Slab bars shall have continuous slab bolsters for bottom bars spaced a maximum distance of 48 inches on center, and for individual high chairs spaced 48 inches with a no.6 continuous support bar for top bars. Top bar supports shall be spaced a maximum distance apart of 48 inches and no greater than 18 inches from the overhanging ends of bars.

3. Beam bottom bars shall have beam bolsters spaced a maximum distance of 72 inches. Top beam bars may be supported from beam stirrups where permitted provided beam stirrups are fabricated sufficiently accurate to permit top bars to be placed within the tolerances permitted. Individual high chairs are required where ties or other supports are not provided.

4. Box out all slots, chases, recesses or openings as shown on the drawings and specifications and as required by the work of other trades. Box out for all temporary openings such as slots, pipe spaces, etc., and build forms to seal up when and as required. Inserts, anchors, ties, hangers, etc. shall be built into concrete as required to secure the work of the various


subcontractors. Collars, sleeves, thimbles, anchors, sockets, etc., shall be furnished to the General Contractor by the other subcontractors for installation in the formwork. Sleeves shall not displace the reinforcing steel from its designated location by more than one bar diameter unless approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction and the coordination of the placement of items affecting each trade in the formwork.

M. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

N. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least 1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6 inches. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. Wire mesh shall be so placed as to positively secure its position 1/3 of the slab thickness below the top of the slab for slabs on grade.

O. Splices and offsets in reinforcements at points of maximum stress shall not be made. All splices shall be approved, and shall provide sufficient lap to transfer the stress between the bars by the required development length of the bars. The character and design of each splice shall conform to the requirements of the ACI 318. Bars shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened concrete, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings shall not be placed. The heating of reinforcement for bending or straightening will be permitted only if the entire operation is approved by the Engineer.

P. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

Q. The Engineer shall always be notified of the pouring schedule in advance and in ample time prior to placement of concrete to inspect the reinforcement. Inspection of reinforcement will be made only after each section to be poured is complete.

3.10 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Clean joint surface of laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter to expose aggregate. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has hardened; at joints between foundation systems and walls dampen, but do not saturate, the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete immediately before placing fresh concrete. In lieu of neat cement grout, bonding grout may


be a commercial bonding agent. Apply to cleaned concrete surfaces in accordance with the printed instruction of this bonding material manufacturer.

C. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete will be least impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls, and foundation systems.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders near the middle of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

D. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants are indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.


F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.11 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Provide PVC Waterstops in all construction joints in concrete walls and in concrete beams and slabs. PVC waterstops shall also be provided between concrete beams and slabs at all expansion joints to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.12 SLABS ON GRADE:

A. Preparation of Subgrade: The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. The in-place density of the subgrade soils shall be at least the minimum required in the specifications. The bottom of an undrained granular base course shall not be lower than the adjacent finished grade. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing, it shall be raised and maintained above 50 degrees F. long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of concreting. If necessary, it shall be dampened with water in advance of concreting, but there shall be no free water standing on the subgrade nor any muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed.

B. Joints: Joints in slabs on grade shall be located as to divide the slab in areas not in excess of 800 sq. ft. The maximum distance between joints in slabs on grade at all points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces such as foundation walls and elsewhere as indicated. At exposed joints, recess the premolded fill on a minimum of ½-inch, and fill the remaining section with a joint seal and as specified herein. All exposed construction joints in the slabs on grade shall have the edges tooled and the crack and groove formed by the edging tool filled with a polyurethane joint sealant. No Form-A-Key or similar metal form joints will be permitted.


3.13 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in must be complete. Notify other crafts involved in ample time to permit the installation of their work; co-operate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Notify Engineer upon completion of installation of all reinforcing and other items in ample time to permit inspection of the work. Soil bottoms at foundation systems are subject to testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer. Place concrete immediately after approval of foundation excavations.

B. Before placing concrete, all equipment for mixing and transporting and placing concrete shall be cleaned, all debris and ice removed from spaces to be occupied by the concrete, forms thoroughly cleaned of soil, ice, or other coatings which will prevent proper bond, reinforcement shall be securely tied in place and expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items shall be securely positioned. Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the conveying equipment.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Place concrete in compliance with the practices and recommendations of ACI 304 or as herein specified. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the required quality concrete is obtained. Conveying equipment shall be of size and design to insure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery point.

E. Concrete placed by pumping shall conform to the recommendations of ACI Publication, "Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods."

F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints shall be located at points as provided for in the drawings or as approved. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.


3. Do not use concrete which has become non-plastic and unworkable or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has become contaminated by foreign material. Remove rejected concrete from the project site and dispose of in an acceptable location. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, and tamping. Vibration of forms and reinforcing steel will not be permitted.

4. Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.

G. Do not use concrete which has become non-plastic and unworkable or does not meet the required quality control limits, or which has become contaminated by foreign material. Remove rejected concrete from the project site and dispose of in an acceptable location. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, and tamping. Vibration of forms and reinforcing steel will not be permitted.

H. Concrete shall not be allowed to "freefall" a distance greater than 36 inches. All concrete placed in columns and walls shall be placed through a tremie with the bottom or outlet of the tremie being held at maximum of 36 inches above the surface where concrete is being placed.

I. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct

elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and

open-textured surface plane, free of lumps and hollows before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. All concrete placed in temperatures 40 degrees F. or below or exposed to temperatures 40 degrees F. or below within five (5) days after the concrete is placed, shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.


2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

K. The following protection requirements for concrete placed, protected, and cured in temperature 40 degrees F. or less shall be considered the minimum acceptable standards.

1. Slabs, Beams: Enclose the entire perimeter of the floor below with a continuous sheet of reinforced polyethylene or canvas. The enclosure shall be securely fastened to the top of the outside edge of the forms of the area being protected and to the slab or floor level immediately below the concrete being protected. The top of the concrete surface shall be covered with either insulating blankets designed specifically for this use, or sheets of polystyrene covered with polyethylene. Sufficient heaters shall be placed in the enclosure below the slabs to maintain the air temperature within all sections of the enclosure between 60 degrees F. and 70 degrees F. for a minimum period of five (5) days. Salamanders will not be permitted.

2. Columns and Walls: Forms shall remain in place for a minimum of five days. When the outside temperature falls below 32 degrees F., an insulating blanket shall be dropped over and around the perimeter of the column or wall. These blankets shall remain in place for a minimum period of five days.

3. Slabs on Grade: Cover top with insulating blankets. Blankets shall remain in place for a minimum period of five days.

4. Temperature of concrete at placement shall not be less than 55 degrees F.

5. In addition to laboratory-cured test specimens, additional concrete test specimens shall be cured under the same field conditions that the concrete in the field represented by these cylinders is cured and high thermometers shall be placed on the surface of slab to record daily temperatures during curing period.

L. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305 and as follows:

1. An approved admixture designed to retard the rate of set shall be used for all concrete placed when temperatures exceed 75 degrees F. Set retarding admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type D, water reducing and retarding.

2. Wet forms thoroughly before placing. Cool reinforcing by wetting sufficiently so that steel temperatures will be nearly equal to the ambient air temperature.


3. Provide wind breaks around the perimeter of the area where concrete is being placed.

4. Fresh concrete with temperatures 90 degrees F. or above shall be discarded off site.

5. The amount of cement used in the job is computed for the temperature indicated on the approved design mix. For higher concrete mix temperature, the weight of the cement shall be increased at the rate of 12 lbs. per cubic yard for each 10 degrees F. above the concrete mix temperature.

3.14 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Standard Rough Form Finish: Provide a standard rough form finish to all concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed in the finish work or other construction. NOTE: Interior faces of walls of water retaining structures are not considered to be concealed. Standard rough form finish shall consist of all defective areas repaired as specified and all holes or voids larger than 3/8 inch filled with cement grout.

B. Standard Finish for Exposed Surfaces: Provide an applied surface finish of "Thoroseal" or an approved equal to all exposed interior and exterior concrete finishes unless otherwise noted. Interior faces of walls of water retaining structures, including areas which are normally submerged, are considered to be exposed surfaces and shall receive the specified standard finish for exposed surfaces. The surface finish shall consist of chopping and/or grinding down all high spots removing grinding of all burrs and/or other projections, filling all voids 3/8 inch and larger, and cutting out all unsound concrete and patching as specified herein. Before applying the finish, wet and clean the surface of all grease, oils, efflorescence, and other foreign material. Dampen surface immediately ahead of application. Apply the finish coat with a tampico fiber brush by laying the finish coat on the wall in a thick coat of a minimum of 2 lbs. per sq. yard, and brush to a uniform level surface. Do not apply in temperatures 40 degrees F or below, or when temperatures are likely to fall below 40 degrees F within 24 hours after application. The finish coat shall be mixed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. After the finish coat has cured, apply a finish coat of "Quick Seal" at a minimum of 12 lb. per sq. yd. The Thoroseal shall be applied by trained technicians.

C. Smooth Form Finish: Provide a smooth form finish for all exposed interior concrete walls inside buildings, in pipe gallery areas, or as noted on the Drawings. Standard form finish shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the forms and the number of seams and joints shall be kept to a minimum. Immediately after forms are removed, cut out all unsound concrete and patch as specified herein, and fill all pinholes and other voids larger than ¼ inch with a cement grout. Compress mortar into voids


with a firm rubber trowel or float. After mortar dries, wipe off surface with burlap.

3.15 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratched Finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance, but still plastic, the surface shall be roughened with stiff brushes or rakes before a final set. A scratched finish shall be applied to all surfaces which are to receive a bonded surface finish.

C. Floated Finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10’-0” straight edge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface with Class B tolerance throughout. This slab shall then be floated immediately to a uniform sandy texture. A float finish shall be applied to all slab surfaces which are to receive a waterproofing membrane.

D. Troweled Finish: The surface shall first be float-finished as specified. It shall next be power troweled, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after power floating shall produce a smooth surface which may still show some trowel marks. Additional troweling shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture, and appearance, and shall be planed to a Class tolerance. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding. A trowel finish shall be applied to all surfaces which are exposed to view or are to receive a floor covering of carpet, vinyl, asbestos, tiles, etc.

E. Broom Finish: Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish as specified in Section B, it shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. A broom finish shall be applied to all parking surfaces, exterior concrete walks, and concrete paving slabs.


3.16 FINISHING TOLERANCES

A. Finishes with a Class C tolerance shall be true planes within ¼ inch in 24 inches as determined by a 24-inch straight edge placed elsewhere on the slab in any direction. Variation from level for Class A. tolerance shall not exceed ¼ inch in 10'-0" or ½ inch maximum in any one bay between columns. Variation from level for a Class B and Class C finish shall not exceed ¼ inch in 10'-0" or ¾ inch in any one bay between columns.

3.17 RELATED UNFORMED SURFACES

A. As tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surface unless otherwise shown.

3.18 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.19 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant


temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.

C. Curing for all horizontal slab surfaces, except those to receive a bonded finish material, during periods when the outside air temperature does not exceed 60 degrees F. shall be provided by applying a membrane-forming curing compound to concrete surfaces as soon as the final troweling or floating operation has been completed. Apply uniformly with a roller brush at a rate not to exceed 200 sq. ft. per gallon. Maintain the continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire curing period. Curing for surfaces to receive a bonded finish material shall be as noted below. Curing for all horizontal surfaces during period when the outside air temperature will exceed 60 degrees F. shall be provided by covering the entire surface with burlap. The burlap shall be lapped 1/2 width in order to provide a double thickness of burlap. Immediately following the placement of the burlap, the entire surface shall be maintained continuously wet for a period of 7 days. Do not permit surfaces to dry at any period during the required curing period.

D. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing with the forms in place for the full curing period, or until forms are removed. If forms are removed before the curing period is complete, apply a membrane-forming curing compound to damp surfaces as soon as the water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by roller brushes in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.

E. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or with any other cover or finish material which shall be bonded to the concrete. These surfaces must be watercured with a full coverage of burlap kept continuously moist for a period of 7 days.

F. During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, including load stresses, shocks, excessive vibration and from change caused by subsequent construction operations.

3.20 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.


C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.21 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.

B. Repair and patch defective areas immediately after removal of forms as directed by the Engineer. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over ½ inch in diameter and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surfaces. Expose reinforcing steel with at least ¾ inch clearance all around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of the same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Place, compact, and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.

C. Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger type gun or other suitable device from the least exposed face to insure complete filling. Remove stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning for all exposed surfaces. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by the dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with a neat cement grout coating. Place dry-pack, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a no. 16 mesh sieve using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match the existing surface.

D. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

E. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has cured at least 14 days. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Engineer.


3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: The Owner shall employ a concrete testing laboratory to provide all laboratory testing services on the project and a concrete technician to perform all quality control tests on concrete and materials used to batch concrete. The testing agency employed shall meet the requirement of ASTM E 329.

B. Such tests will be provided and paid for by the Owner, except that tests which reveal non-conformance with the Specifications and all succeeding tests for the same area, until conformance with the Specifications is established shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The Owner will be responsible for paying for only the successful tests.

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate facilities on the project for the testing laboratory to locate the required testing equipment and for safe storage area for test cylinders. The general contractor shall provide at his own expense all casual labor needed to assist the concrete technician in obtaining samples of concrete and concrete materials and moving and transporting cylinders and materials which are being tested.

D. The following services shall be performed by the designated testing agency:

1. Review and/or check-test the Contractor's proposed materials for compliance with the specifications.

2. Review and/or check-test the Contractor's proposed mix design as required by the Engineer.

3. Secure production samples of materials at plants or stock piles during the course of the work and test for compliance with the specifications.

4. Conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures:

a. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement.

b. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 31. Any deviations from the requirements of this Standard shall be recorded in the test report.

c. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in the test show any of the above defects, the entire test


shall be discarded. When high early strength concrete is used, the specimens shall be tested at the ages indicated in the Contract Documents.

d. Make at least one strength test for each 50 cu. yd., or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any l day. When the total quantity of concrete with a given mix design is less than 50 cu. yd., the strength test may be waived by the Engineer if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided, such as strength test results for the same kind of concrete supplied on the same day and under comparable conditions to other work or other projects.

5. Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C 143.

6. Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either ASTM C 231, ASTM C 173, or ASTM C 138 as appropriate.

7. Determine unit weight of concrete sample for each strength test. 8. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. 9. Determine in-place strength of concrete by curing cylinders under the

same field conditions that the concrete representing these field cylinders is cured and additionally by determining the degree/hours of curing required for the concrete to develop the required strength for form removal.

10. Inspect concrete batching, mixing and delivery operations to the extent deemed necessary by the Engineer.

11. Review the manufacturer's report for each shipment of cement.

E. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate log showing the following information:

1. Date of pour 2. Area poured 3. Temperature at time of pour 4. Average ambient temperature during curing period 5. Date forms scheduled for removal 6. Date form removal completed 7. Method of reshoring (number of floor, etc.) 8. Test cylinder serial numbers 9. Strength of test cylinders at 7 and 28 days.

3.23 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. The concrete quality control testing as specified will be evaluated by the following criteria:


1. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive strength test results equal or exceed the 28 day design compressive strength of the type of class of concrete; and, no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. If compressive strength tests fail to meet these requirements, the concrete represented by these tests will be considered deficient and subject to additional testing and/or removal.

2. Concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerance and finishes, shall be corrected as directed at the Contractors expense, without extension of time therefor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to the concrete work. Core tests, if required, shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318.

3. The testing agency shall further provide quality control inspection and testing of materials used in concrete. The following inspection and tests shall be on all equipment and materials on a random basis:

a. Fineness modulus and gradation of sand b. Fineness modulus and gradation of coarse aggregate. c. Colorimetric of sand. d. Weight per cu. ft. and percent of voids on a dry rodded basis of the

coarse aggregate. e. Check of aggregate stock piles for contamination or intermingling of

aggregates. f. Check of mixing equipment and trucks for compliance with ASTM C

94. g. Absorption of stone and sand.

3.24 LEAK TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

A. All concrete structures which will retain water or wastewater under normal operating conditions shall be filled with water prior to backfilling and final exterior painting and tested for leaks. Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the tank shall remain filled with water for a period of seven (7) days. Any leaks, damp spots, or other defects found shall be repaired and made water tight to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The first 48 hours of the test are utilized to allow the concrete to absorb water. After the first 48 hours of the test, the water level shall be noted and monitored for the remaining five (5) days. A reduction in water greater than 0.1 percent per 24 hours shall be considered excessive and shall constitute failure of the leak test. (NOTE: Rainfall and evaporation must be considered during calculation of water loss. Rainfall shall be added to and evaporation shall be deducted from the measured loss to determine net liquid loss.)



SEPTEMBER 2019 Project #18.08502 099000 – Page 1

SECTION 099000 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes preparation of all surfaces to be painted, all field painting, the repairs to the shop priming or finish coats of paint, and the furnishing and installation of pipe markers, signs and similar items. In general, all equipment furnished with standard shop finishes shall be field painted, except graphic panels, electrical equipment, instruments, and similar items with baked-on enamel finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU – Concrete Masonry Unit

B. CSP – Concrete Standard Profile

C. DFT – Dry Film Thickness

D. ICRI – International Concrete Repair Institute

E. NACE – National Association of Corrosion Engineers

F. SF – Square Foot or Square Feet

G. SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Council (now known as the Society for Protective Coatings)

H. °F – Degrees Fahrenheit

1.4 CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall have five (5) years practical experience and successful history in the application of specified products in similar projects. They shall


substantiate this requirement by furnishing a list of references and job completions.

B. Applicator must successfully demonstrate to the product manufacturer the ability to apply the material correctly and within the confines of the specifications. The Contractor must provide a letter from the manufacturer stating their acceptance of the Contactor for this project to apply these products.

C. The Contractor shall be expected to provide tools and equipment in first class working order.

D. All directions with respect to temperature, humidity, surface preparation, mixing ratios, induction times, recoat times, and touch up procedures as set forth by the manufacturer shall be adhered to exactly. Nothing in these specifications shall be deemed to cancel or supersede the directions of the coatings manufacturer, except where specific film thickness or spreading rates are set forth. Deviations between these specifications and the manufacturer’s recommendations regarding film thickness shall be resolved utilizing the thicker of the indicated coating thickness.

E. No additional compensation will be made for equipment required to maintain proper environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity) such as portable heaters or dehumidifiers.

F. The Contractor shall be expected to provide and be familiar with the use of film thickness gauges (wet and dry), holiday detectors, sling psychrometer, and such other instruments or gauges or other equipment as may be required to comply with the manufacturer's instructions.

G. The Contractor shall possess the applicable license(s) to perform the work as herein described and as specified by Local, State and Federal laws. The Contractor shall include his license number(s) on the front of the envelope containing his bid.

H. The Contractor shall submit certification from the paint manufacturer indicating that the quantity of each coating purchased was sufficient to properly coat all surfaces. Such certification shall indicate square footage quantities provided to the manufacturer and the Owner by the Contractor.

I. The Contractor shall provide a site mock up with each paint system as a representative of how the systems shall be installed and their final appearance (to include color, sheen, texture etc), which is to be approved by the Engineer before any work is started. For overcoat projects this mock up shall be used to test for adequate adhesion. This approved mock up shall be the quality standard for the rest of the project. This mock up location, size and other job specifics needs shall be detailed by the Engineer.


1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General:

1. All field painting shall be under the direct and complete control of the Contractor and only skilled painters shall be used in the work. All paint shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed. Film thickness of applied paint shall be at least equal to the value determined by the number of coats multiplied by the thickness per coat schedule on the plans for specific paint products. If other paint products are approved, the thickness per coat shall be as determined by the Engineer. A film thickness indicator will be used by the Engineer to determine compliance with the specifications. When field coats of paint are to be applied to shop painted or shop primed surfaces, care shall be taken to insure that only compatible paints are used.

2. Pans or pails of adequate capacity shall be used for mixing paints or similar materials. All paint shall be thoroughly stirred before being taken from the containers and all ready mixed paint shall be applied exactly as received from the manufacturer and no thinner or drier shall be added except as specified, permitted or directed by the Engineer. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the approximate shade of the finished coat.

3. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to facilitate inspection. All materials that receive surface preparation shall receive the primer application the same day that the surface preparation is performed and before flash rusting occurs. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.

4. In general, aluminum, stainless steel, copper, and bronze work shall not be field painted. Care shall be taken not to paint shafts, grease fittings, nameplates, machined parts, sight glasses, etc.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of these specifications.

B. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of six (6) copies of complete shop drawings to the Engineer for approval. Shop drawings shall include a coating schedule, manufacturer’s data sheets for all coatings, and color charts. All colors shall be selected by the Owner.



A. All paint shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with at least ten (10) years experience in the manufacture of industrial grade coatings. Paint shall be as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or approved equal.

B. General: Quality assurance procedures and practices shall be utilized to monitor all phases of surface preparation, application, and inspection throughout the duration of the project. Procedures or practices not specifically defined herein may be utilized provided they meet recognized and accepted professional standards and are approved by the Engineer.

C. Surface Preparation: Surface preparation will be based upon comparison with: "Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces", SSPC Vis 1 and ASTM D 2200; "Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces" SSPC Vis 2 and ASTM D 610; "Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Air blast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive" or “Guideline for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coating and Polymer Overlays” and ICRI 310.2 Surface Profile Replica Chips.

D. Application: No coating or paint shall be applied: When the surrounding air temperature or the temperature of the surface to be coated is below the minimum required temperature for the specified product; to wet or damp surfaces or in fog or mist; when the temperature is less than 5 degrees F. above the dew point; when the air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F. within six hours after application of coating. Dew point shall be measured by use of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables. If above conditions are prevalent, coating or painting shall be delayed or postponed until conditions are favorable. The day's coating or painting shall be completed in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by atmospheric conditions. No coatings shall be applied in a dust-laden environment.

E. Thickness and Holiday Checking: Thickness of coatings and paint shall be checked with a non-destructive, magnetic type thickness gauge. The integrity of coated interior surfaces shall be tested with an approved inspection device. Non-destructive holiday detectors shall not exceed the voltage recommended by the manufacturer of the coating system. All holiday testing shall be conducted in accordance with NACE SP 0188. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils (250 microns and 500 microns), a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo Flo, may be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. All pinholes shall be marked, repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations, and retested. No pinholes or other irregularities will be permitted in the final coating.


F. Inspection Devices: The Contractor shall furnish, until final acceptance of coating and painting, inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thickness of coating and paint. The Contractor shall also furnish U.S. Department of Commerce; National Bureau of Standard certified thickness calibration plates to test accuracy of dry film thickness gauges and certified instrumentation to test accuracy of holiday detectors.

G. All necessary testing equipment shall be made available for the Engineer’s use at all times until final acceptance of application. Holiday detection devices shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer.

H. A NACE certified technical representative from the paint manufacturer shall visit the job site to support the Contractor's personnel, the Owner and/or the Engineer as needed and/or requested. Visits shall be made as needed help to assure the quality of the materials and workmanship.

1.8 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In accordance with requirements set forth by regulatory agencies applicable to the construction industry and manufacturer's printed instructions and appropriate technical bulletins and manuals, the Contractor shall provide and require use of personnel protective lifesaving equipment for persons working on or about the project site.

B. Head and Face Protection and Respiratory Devices: Equipment shall include protective helmets, which shall be worn by all persons while in the vicinity of the work. In addition, workers engaged in or near the work during sandblasting shall wear eye and face protection devices and air purifying halfmask or mouthpiece respirators with appropriate filters. Barrier creams shall be used on any exposed areas of skin.

C. Ventilation: Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all equipment shall be explosion proof. Ventilation shall reduce the concentration of air contaminant to the degree a hazard does not exist. Air circulation and exhausting of solvent vapors shall be continued until coatings have fully cured.

D. Sound Levels: Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum allowable sound levels, the Contractor shall provide and require the use of approved ear protective devices.

E. Illumination: Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress, including explosion proof lights and electrical equipment. Illumination of the work area shall be in accordance with SSPC Technology Guide No. 12 "Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects" for general work, surface preparation application and inspection.


F. Confined Space: When applicable it is mandatory that all work be performed in compliance with OSHA'S rules and regulations for working in confined space. Atmospheres within confined spaces as defined by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration are classified as being either a Class A, Class B or Class C environment.


A. All materials to be used in the work, including paints, stains, varnishes, thinners, etc. shall be delivered to the site in their original unbroken containers. All ingredients shall be prepared, packed, labeled, and guaranteed by the manufacturer. All materials shall be stored in enclosed structures to protect them from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable coatings or paint must be stored in accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer or not stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions shall be rejected.

B. Paint storage space shall be kept clean at all times and every precaution shall be taken to avoid fire hazards.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 50°F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The work covered by this Section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance against defective materials and faulty workmanship. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the work during the guaranty period, the affected work shall be repaired or replaced promptly at the expense of the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All products shall be from a single manufacturer. Although the coatings listed in the general paint schedule include products from several manufacturers for the purpose of specifying the type of coating system, a single manufacturer shall be


selected by the Contractor for all products throughout the project. All paint products shall be as manufactured by Carboline, Sherwin-Williams, Tnemec, or approved equal.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Provide material for use within a selected paint system that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated, under the conditions of service and application as recommended by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. All finish colors except as noted in this Specification for Pipelines shall be selected by the Owner prior to application by the Contractor. Color chips shall be submitted to the Engineer for color selection. From time to time, as the Engineer may direct analyses of paint and oil, or pigment samples may be made and any samples that are found not complying with these specifications may be cause for rejection of the paint. The cost of the analyses and the cost of supplying paint that complies with these specifications shall be at the Contractor's expense.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All surface preparation, coating and painting shall conform to applicable standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council, NACE, ICRI and the manufacturer's printed instructions. Material applied prior to approval of the surface by the Engineer shall be removed and reapplied to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.

B. All work shall be performed by skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the required work in a manner comparable with the best standards of practice. Continuity of personnel shall be maintained and transfers of key personnel shall be coordinated with the Engineer.

C. The Contractor shall provide an English speaking supervisor at the work site at all times.

D. Dust, dirt, oil, grease or any foreign matter that will affect the adhesion or durability of the finish must be removed by washing with clean rags dipped in an approved cleaning solvent and wiped dry with clean rags.

E. The Contractor's coating and painting equipment shall be designed for application of materials specified and shall be maintained in first class working


condition. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and oils from the air.

F. Application of the first coat shall follow immediately after surface preparation and cleaning and before rust bloom or flash rusting occurs. Any cleaned areas not receiving first coat within this period shall be recleaned prior to application of first coat.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for temperature, maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified below and shall be clean and dry before painting. The maximum moisture content of substrates when measured with an electronic moisture meter shall be as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent

4. Plaster: 12 percent

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are clean and dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.3 CONTAINMENT AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS DEBRIS AND/OR PAINT CHIPS (AS NECESSARY)

A. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety & Health Standards 29 CFR 1910.1025.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible to make provisions to contain any cleaning residue and/or old paint to within the property and the required containment. Blast cleaning operations shall not begin until the containment method is approved by the Owner's representative.


C. All debris and blast related media shall be collected at the end of each workday. All debris shall be placed in approved containers for proper disposal.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, disposal, and costs required for the disposal of any and all debris generated as part of this contract. Contractor shall take positive steps to ensure that solid and hazardous waste including used solvent and solvent rags is separated from other debris.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for the certified laboratory test report to determine if the residue generated during the blasting and paint removal operations on the structure exceeds "leachable" limits for lead, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, mercury, selenium, and silver as determined by EPA's Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). A copy of the certified report shall be furnished to the Engineer.

F. The Contractor shall sandblast a representative area and collect the debris generated. The Contractor shall also collect a representative sample of old paint chips from the structure. Samples shall be collected in the presence of the Owner or Engineer and sent to a laboratory for analysis. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a certified test report of the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) documenting the results of a representative random sample taken from the debris and paint chips. The certified report shall state that the results are for the specific job. Should the result exceed any of the EPA maximum limits, the Contractor shall apply for an EPA identification number for a generator of hazardous waste on Notification Form 8700 12. Application and disposal of debris generated shall be through the appropriate local, state or federal officials.

G. Should the results of the certified test be less than the EPA maximum limit the Contractor shall dispose of the debris generated in an approved landfill as directed by Environmental Control and the appropriate local, state or federal officials.

H. If lead is present, the entire structure shall be totally contained with a rigid containment system. Submit a detailed plan for Lead Abatement Plan to conform to OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.1025. Provide a containment system which allows for the efficient containment of environmentally sensitive waste, dust, fumes, and paint debris that will be generated during the blasting operations. The containment systems must be a proven method used previously on similar projects with acceptable results. The Contractor shall comply with the following:

1. Provide a containment system that meets the requirements of SSPC Guide 61 for Class 3 containment with Class A-2 Flexible Walls, Class B-1 Impermeable Walls, Class C-2 Flexible Supports, Class D-1 Full Joint Seals, Class E-2 Entryway with Overlapping Door, Class G-1 Forced Air Flow, and Class J-1 Exhaust Dust Filtration.


2. Contractor must submit a written containment and collection of debris plan.

3. The containment must be designed and erected in such a manner that no damaging loads are imposed by the containment and collection systems of the structure to be painted.

4. The containment system will be evaluated by ambient air monitoring for lead. Samples will be taken at three different locations based around the site. Emissions of lead may not exceed a time weight average of 5 micrograms per cubic meter outside the containment. The Contractor may not continue blasting until initial test results indicating that emissions are below the allowable limit are conveyed to the Engineer.

5. Provide ventilation as described below:

a. The Contractor must provide forced air ventilation during all coating removal, debris removal, and painting operation performed on the structure.

b. The ventilation by forced air system must be sufficient to provide adequate visibility and limit worker lead dust exposure. The minimum required ventilation shall be 40,000 CFM. Should worker exposure to lead dust become excessive or visibility drop to an unacceptable level, then reconfiguration of the ventilation system requiring the use of flexible and/or rigid duct work and additional forced air ventilation capacity shall be required.

c. All ventilation equipment shall be explosion proof. d. The exhaust ventilation system will be evaluated by ambient air

monitoring. Emissions above a time weighted average of 5 micrograms per cubic meter shall be cause for blasting operation shut down and reevaluation of the exhaust and ventilation system. Modifications to the containment shall be made until compliance is achieved.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. All parties, to include the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, installer, any subs and the product manufacture, shall meet prior to any work is started to review the specification and discuss job specific expectations, needs and requirements.

B. Comply with all manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Clean all substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, debris, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

E. All surface preparation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council and NACE.

1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil and other contaminants by use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning or similar materials and methods which involve a solvent or cleaning action. This standard is an integral part of all other standards, shall precede any other surface preparation described herein, and is not required to be referenced separately.

2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by hand chipping, scraping, sanding and wire brushing.

3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust' loose mill scale and other detrimental foreign matter to degree specified by power wire brushing, power impact tools or power sanders.

4. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7/NACE 4): Brush-off blast cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on the surface. Mill scale, rust, and coating are considered tightly adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife after abrasive blast cleaning has been performed.

5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3): Blast cleaning until at least 66 percent of unit area is free or all visible residues.

6. Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10/NACE 2): Blast cleaning to nearly white metal cleanliness, until at least 95 percent of unit area is free of all visible residues.


7. Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP13/NACE 6): This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical, chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective coating or lining systems.

8. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal (SSPC-SP11): This standard covers the requirements for power tool cleaning to produce a bare metal surface and to retain or produce a minimum 25 micrometer (1.0 mil) surface profile. This standard is suitable where a roughened, clean, bare metal surface is required, but where abrasive blasting is not feasible or permissible.

F. Blast cleaning for all surfaces shall be by dry method unless otherwise directed.

G. Particle size of abrasives used in blast cleaning shall be that which will produce a 1.5 – 2.0 mil (37.5 microns - 50.0- microns) surface profile or in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer of the specified coating or paint system to be applied.

H. Abrasive used in blast cleaning operations shall be new, washed, graded and free of contaminants that would interfere with adhesion of coating or paint and shall not be reused unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

I. During blast cleaning operations, caution shall be exercised to insure that surrounding existing coatings or paint are not exposed to abrasion from blast cleaning.

J. The Contractor shall keep the area of his work and the surrounding environment in a clean condition. He shall not permit blasting materials to accumulate as to constitute a nuisance or hazard to the accomplishment of the work, the operation of the existing facilities, or nuisance to the surrounding environment.

K. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of specified coatings or paint. No coatings or paint shall be applied over damp or moist surfaces.

L. Specific Surface Preparation: Surface preparation for the specific system shall be as specified herein.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions based on the materials being coated and their exposure conditions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.


2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

B. Protective coverings or drop cloths shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and equipment. Care shall be exercised to prevent coatings or paint from being spattered onto surfaces that are not to be coated or painted. Surfaces from which materials cannot be removed satisfactorily shall be recoated or repainted as required to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.

C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

E. Each application of coating or paint shall be applied evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be exercised to avoid lapping on glass or hardware. Coatings and paints shall be sharply cut to lines. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. All coats herein specified are in addition to shop or other coats specified to be applied by other trades.

F. All welds, edges and other irregular surfaces shall receive a brush coat of the specified product prior to application of the first complete coat.

G. All items listed below shall be painted unless specifically noted otherwise. Items which come from the manufacturer completely painted shall be given a single coat of machinery enamel or shall be "touched-up" only as directed by the Engineer.

H. Where appropriate, all solvent vapors shall be completely removed by suction type exhaust fans and blowers before placing in operating service.

I. Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, all exposed pipelines and equipment shall be painted and identified as follows:

Item Color Equipment & Pumps Imperial Blue

Water Lines Raw or Recycled Water Olive Green

Settled or Clarified Aqua Finished or Potable Water Dark Blue

Non-Potable Water Light Gray With Yellow Band Chemical Lines


Alum or Primary Coagulant Orange Ammonia White

Carbon Slurry Black Caustic Yellow with Green Band

Chlorine (Gas and Solution) Yellow Chlorine Dioxide Yellow with Violet Band

Fluoride Light Blue with Red Band Lime Slurry Light Green

Ozone Yellow with Orange Band Phosphate Compounds Light Green with Red Band

Polymers or Coagulant Aids Orange with Green Band Potassium Permanganate Violet

Soda Ash Light Green with Orange Band Sulfuric Acid Yellow with Red Band

Sulfur Dioxide Light Green with Yellow Band All PVC Chemical Lines Unpainted with Stenciled Labels

Waste Lines Backwash Waste Light Brown

Sludge Dark Brown Sewer (Sanitary or Other) Dark Gray

Other Chlorine Gas Safety Yellow

Compressed Air Dark Green Natural Gas Safety Red

J. All exposed pipes shall have stenciled arrows pointing in the direction of flow, with fluid labels every 10’-0” or at convenient locations.

K. General:

1. In general, equipment previously shop painted with the Manufacturer's standard paint system shall be repainted with colors to suit the area of installation. The Engineer may, at his option, require that certain equipment not be painted. The Contractor shall verify that all field coatings are compatible with the shop coatings.

2. Imperfections and scratches on equipment not repainted shall be touched up with matching paint provided by the Equipment Manufacturer.

3. Where more than one coat of paint is required, the undercoats shall be a shade lighter than succeeding coats to insure complete coverage.

4. Colors shall be as selected by the Owner.

5. Aluminum and stainless steel surfaces shall not be painted unless specifically indicated in the specifications or drawings.


6. All pipes and other metals that have been dipped in tar or bituminous products shall receive two (2) coats of an anti-bleeding sealer in place of priming coat.

7. Bronze and brass shall not be painted unless specifically required or requested by the Engineer. Galvanized metal and the other metals, which require painting shall receive one (1) coat of a vinyl wash primer before prime painting.

3.6 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. NOTE: Contractor shall select all coating systems for the entire project from a single manufacturer. Approved equal systems may be utilized if approved by the Engineer.

B. Masonry:

1. All interior and exterior exposed concrete block walls above and below grade shall be painted.

a. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, no cracks or nail heads.

b. Coating system: System

Manufacturer First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish

Carboline Sanitile 600

(at 60-70 SF/gallon) Carboguard 890

(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Carbothane 133 HB (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)

Sherwin-Williams Cement-Plex 875 (at 75 SF/gallon)

Macropoxy 646 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)


Tnemec Series 607 Prime-A-Pell Plus (at 75-100

SF/Gallon)

Series 607 Conformal Stain

(at 75-100 SF/Gallon) N/A

C. Exterior Concrete:

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of Concrete. Power wash with 5,000 psi using the rotating “turbo” nozzle, to remove all loose paint, dirt, dust, mildew and all other foreign matter. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

System Manufacturer

First/Prime Second/Intermediate Third/Finish




Sherwin-Williams Loxon Conditioner

A24-100 (at 200-300 SF/Gallon)

Loxon XP (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT)

Loxon XP (at 6.4-8.3 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip (at 0.7-1.5 mils DFT)

Series 156 Enviro-Crete (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

Series 156 Enviro-Crete (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)


D. Interior Concrete:

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of Concrete, ICRI CSP 3. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

E. Concrete Floors: (All new concrete floors shall be coated gray unless otherwise indicated.)


2. Coating System:

F. Concrete (Potable or Non-Potable Immersion):


2. Coating System:

System Manufacturer




(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890

(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

Sherwin-Williams Kem Cati Coat Epoxy

filler B42 Series (at 10.0-20.0 mils DFT)

Pro Industrial HB Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy




Tnemec Series 1254 EpoxoBlock

(at 75 SF/Gal) Series 27WB Typoxy (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)

Series 27WB Typoxy (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)

System Manufacturer


Carboline Carboguard 1340 WB (at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT)

Carboguard 890 (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)

Carboguard 890 (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT)

Sherwin-Williams Corobond 100

(at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) Cor-Cote HP

(at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) Cor-Cote HP


Tnemec Series 201 Epoxoprime (at 8.0-12.0 mils DFT)

Series 281 Tneme-Glaze


Series 247 UVX (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)

System Manufacturer


Carboline Carboguard 510

(at 1/8 inch) Carboguard 891



Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300 (at Macropoxy 646 PW (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

Macropoxy 646 PW (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 218 MortarClad

(at 1/8 inch)

Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus





G. Concrete (Wastewater Immersion):


2. Coating System:

H. Exposed Steel:

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6/NACE3 Commercial blast cleaning. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

I. Steel (Potable or Non Potable Immersion):

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

System Manufacturer



(at 1/8 inch) Carboguard 890



Sherwin-Williams Corobond 300 (at Corcote SC Plus (at 40.0-

125.0 mils DFT) Corcote SC Plus (at 40.0-125.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 218 MortarClad

(at 1/8 inch)

Series 434 Perma-Sheild H2S

(at 120.0-125.0 mils DFT)

Series 435 Perma-Glaze (at 15.0-20.0 mils DFT)

System Manufacturer




N/A

Sherwin-Williams Corothane 1 Mio Zinc (at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT)

Macropoxy 646 FC (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

WB Acrolon 100 (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane (at 2.5-3.5 mils DFT)

Series 27WB Typoxy (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)


System Manufacturer



(at 4.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 891



Sherwin-Williams Corothane I Galvapac (at 3.0-4.0 mils DFT)



Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane (at

2.5-3.5 mils DFT)






J. Steel (Wastewater Immersion):

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10/NACE2 Near-white blast cleaning with a minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

K. Exposed Galvanized Steel:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove all soluble and insoluble contaminants and corrosion. Remove any storage stains per Section 6.2 of ASTM D6386. Sweep (Abrasive) Blasting per ASTM D 6386 to achieve a uniform anchor profile (1.0 - 2.0 mils).

2. Coating System:

L. Interior Drywall:

1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System:

System Manufacturer



(at 4.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890



Sherwin-Williams N/A SherGlass FF

(at 8.0-20.0 mils DFT) SherGlass FF


Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane (at

2.5-3.5 mils DFT)

Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU


Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU


System Manufacturer


Carboline Rustbond


Carbothane 133 HB (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)

Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 FC

(at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) WB Acrolon 100

(at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT) N/A

Tnemec Series 27WB Typoxy (at 4.0-8.0 mils DFT)


N/A

System Manufacturer



(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) Carbocrylic 3359



Sherwin-Williams PrepRite 200

(at 1.0-2.0 mils DFT) Water-Based Tile Clad (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)



Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip (at 0.7-1.5 mils DFT)

Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat


Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat



M. Wood:

1. Surface Preparation: The surface must be clean and dry before painting.

2. Coating System: System






Sherwin-Williams PrepRite

(at 1.5-2.0 mils DFT) DTM Acrylic Coating (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)

DTM Acrylic Coating (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 10 Tnemec Primer

(at 2.0-3.5 mils DFT) Series 1028 Enduratone

(at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) Series 1028 Enduratone


3. Finish: Semi-Gloss

N. Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe, Valves, and Fittings (above and below grade)

1. Interior (above grade)

a. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale; blast clean per SSPC-SP5/NACE1 White blast cleaning with a minimum of 3.0 mils of surface profile. Surface must be clean and dry before painting.

b. Coating System: System

Manufacturer First/Prime Second/Final

Carboline Carboguard 60 (at 4.0 mils DFT) Carbothane 133 HB (at 6.0-8.0 mils DFT) Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 431 Prima-Shield PL

(at 40.0 mils DFT) Series 431 Prima-Shield PL

(at 40.0 mils DFT)

2. Exterior (below grade)

a. Surface Preparation: None.

b. Paint system: Manufacturer’s factory paint system as specified elsewhere.

3. Exterior (submerged)

a. Surface Preparation: Blast clean per SSPC-SP10 clean and dry (except galvanized steel piping). Surface profile requirements shall be as recommended on manufacturer’s product data sheets.



Manufacturer First/Prime Second/Intermediate

Carboline Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT) Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 (at 2.0-3.0 mils DFT) Macropoxy 646 (at 4.0-6.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 431 Prima-Shield PL

(at 40.0 mils DFT) Series 431 Prima-Shield PL

(at 40.0 mils DFT)

4. Exterior (exposed)

a. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale; blast clean per SSPC-SP5/NACE1 White blast cleaning with a minimum of 3.0 mils of surface profile. Surface must be clean and dry before painting.



Carboline Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-

6.0 mils DFT) Carboguard 890 (at 4.0-

6.0 mils DFT) Carbothane 133 HB (at 3.0-5.0 mils DFT)

Sherwin-Williams



WB Acrolon 100 (at 2.0-4.0 mils DFT)

Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxo-

line (3.0-5.0 mils DFT) Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxo-

line (3.0-5.0 mils DFT) Series 73 Endura-Shield

(3.0-4.0 mils DFT)


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces which were painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Coating or paint spots and oil or stains on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the jobsite cleaned. All damage to surfaces resulting from the work of this section shall be cleaned, repaired, or refinished to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner.

C. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. All staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.9 SPARE PAINT

A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) gallon of all types and colors of paint to the Owner for future touch-up painting.


SEPTEMBER 2019 Project #18.08502 113090 - Page 1

SECTION 113090 SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMP PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section includes self-priming centrifugal pumps and motors designed for pumping return activated sludge complete with all accessories and appurtenances.

B. All pumps furnished shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be located as shown on the plans. All components of the pumps shall be furnished by one manufacturer.

C. When operating over the specified range of conditions, the pumps shall not cavitate and shall be free of undue noise and vibration.

D. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this

Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition. E. Abbreviations:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials 3. AWWA - American Water Works Association 4. AFBMA - Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer’s Association 5. HI - Hydraulic Institute 6. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 7. NEC - National Electrical Code


A. Design Requirements:

1. Contractor shall furnish and install eight (8) self-priming centrifugal pumps.


2. Solids Handling Capability: All internal passages, impeller vanes, and recirculation ports shall pass a 3" spherical solid. Smaller internal passages that create a maintenance nuisance or interfere with priming and pump performance shall not be permitted. Upon request from the engineer, manufacturer’s certified drawings showing size and location of the recirculation port(s) shall be submitted for approval.

B. Performance Criteria:

1. Pumps must be designed to handle raw, unscreened, domestic sanitary sewage. Pumps shall have 10” suction connection, and 10” discharge connection. Each pump shall be selected to perform under following operating conditions:

Capacity (GPM) ..................................... 2610 gpm

Total Dynamic Head (FT) ...................... 26 ft

Total Discharge Static Head (FT) .......... 11 ft

Maximum Static Suction Lift (FT) .......... 7 ft

C. Utility Power Requirements: Site power furnished to pump station shall be

3 phase, 60 hertz, 480 volts, 3 wire, maintained within industry standards. Voltage tolerance shall be plus or minus 10 percent. Phase-to-phase unbalance shall not exceed 1% average voltage as set forth in NEMA Standard MG-1. Control voltage shall not exceed 132 volts.


A. Manufacturer: The pumps, motors, and all appurtenances shall be supplied by a reputable manufacturer with at least ten (10) years of experience. Pumps shall be as manufactured and supplied by Gorman-Rupp T10 Series. Should the named manufacturer above have any deviations or exceptions from this specification, a letter stating the issues must be received by the Engineer at least seven (7) days prior to the bid opening. Any approved exceptions or deviations will be addressed by Addendum only.


B. Pump Performance Certifications:

1. Re-prime Performance

a. Consideration shall be given to the sanitary sewage service anticipated, in which debris is expected to lodge between the suction check valve and its seat, resulting in the loss of the pump suction leg, and siphoning of liquid from the pump casing to the approximate center line of the impeller. Such occurrence shall be considered normal, and the pump must be capable of automatic, unattended operation with an air release line installed.

b. During unattended operation, the pump shall retain adequate liquid in the casing to insure automatic re-priming while operating at its rated speed in a completely open system. The need for a suction check valve or external priming device shall not be required.

c. Pump must re-prime at the specified speed and impeller diameter. Re-prime lift is defined as the static height of the pump suction above the liquid, while operating with only one-half of the liquid remaining in the pump casing. The pump must re-prime and deliver full capacity within five minutes after the pump is energized in the re-prime condition. Re-prime performance must be confirmed with the following test set-up:

i. A check valve to be installed down stream from the pump discharge flange.

ii. A length of air release pipe shall be installed between pump and the discharge check valve. This line shall be open to atmosphere at all times duplicating the air displacement rate anticipated at a typical pump station fitted with an air release valve.

iii. The pump suction check valve shall be removed. No restrictions in the pump or suction piping will prevent the siphon drop of the suction leg. Suction pipe configuration for re-prime test shall duplicate the suction piping fittings and valves shown on the Contract Drawing.

iv. Impeller clearances shall be set as recommended in the pump service manual.

v. Repeatability of performance shall be demonstrated by testing five consecutive re-prime cycles. Full pump capacity (flow) shall be achieved within five minutes during each cycle.

vi. Liquid to be used for re-prime test shall be water.


2. Upon request from the engineer, certified re-prime performance test results, prepared by the manufacturer, and certified by a registered professional engineer, shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment.

C. Certified Pump Performance Test: Tests shall be conducted in accordance

with Hydraulic Institute Standards 14.6.3.4 Acceptance Grade 2B at the specified head, capacity, rated speed and horsepower. The performance tests will validate the correct performance of the equipment at the design head, capacity and speed.

D. Manufacturer’s Start-Up Services: The manufacturer's technical

representative shall inspect the completed installation, correct or supervise the correction of any defect or malfunction, and instruct operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”. The shop drawings shall include installation drawings, materials of construction, and catalogue cut sheets for all materials being supplied.

2. Provide all information listed under “Prequalification” submittals.

3. Provide guaranteed performance curves with shop drawings.

4. A written statement shall be provided from the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer has reviewed the proposed application as detailed in the Contract drawings and specifications, and that all equipment, materials, and systems proposed to be supplied are appropriate and compatible with this specific application.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer in

accordance with Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data”. The manuals shall include the following information as a minimum requirement:

1. Assembly, installation, and adjustment instructions.

2. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.


3. Complete descriptive literature of all materials and components furnished.

4. Complete control panel fabrication drawings with wire numbers and field modifications. Control panels drawings shall include control schematic.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration

shall occur during shipment or storage. All equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. All complete pumping units including electric motors, auxiliary units, and mounts shall be warranted by the Contractor against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace all parts and accessory construction noted as defective within one (1) year at no cost to the Owner.

B. The performance of all pumps, motors and auxiliary units shall be

guaranteed at the specified pumping conditions. The total horsepower required by the pumps shall not be in excess of that indicated by the results of the manufacturer's show test.

1.09 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION

A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer’s nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, noncorrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate and shall be fully legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the following:

1. Manufacturer’s Serial Number

2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer

3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when applicable

4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)

5. Motor size, speed and voltage


6. Enclosure Type or Rating

7. Any other pertinent information

Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.

B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker

shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local business that can provide service and replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also be included.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SELF-PRIMING CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

A. Pumps shall be horizontal, self-priming centrifugal type, designed

specifically for handling raw, unscreened, sanitary sewage. Pump solids handling capability and performance criteria shall be in accordance with requirements listed under PART 1 - GENERAL of this section.

B. Materials and Construction Features:

1. Pump casing: Casing shall be cast iron Class 30 with integral volute scroll. Casing shall incorporate the following features:

a. Mounting feet sized to prevent tipping or binding when pump

is completely disassembled for maintenance. b. Fill port cover plate, 3-1/2" diameter, shall be opened after

loosening a hand nut/clamp bar assembly. In consideration for safety, hand nut threads must provide slow release of pressure, and the clamp bar shall be retained by detent lugs. A gasket shall prevent adhesion of the fill port cover to the casing.

c. The casing drain plug shall be at least 1-1/4" NPT to insure

complete and rapid draining.


2. Suction Head shall be Class 30 cast iron. Its design must incorporate following maintenance features:

a. The suction head will be secured to the pump casing by using

hex head cap screws and lock washers. Access to the impeller and mechanical seal shall be accomplished by removing the suction head.

b. Removal of any blockages in the impeller shall be

accomplished by removing the suction head, or through a cleanout cover on the suction head. In consideration of safety, two clamp bar screws must provide slow release of pressure on two clamp bars securing the cleanout cover. A Teflon gasket shall prevent adhesion of the cleanout cover to the suction head casing.

c. Removal of the suction check valve shall be accomplished

through the removable cleanout cover on the suction head. d. In consideration for safety, a pressure relief valve shall be

supplied in the suction head. The relief valve shall open at 75-200 PSI.

e. Aggressive Self-Cleaning Wear Plate

i) A replaceable wear plate shall be self-cleaning design

ensuring that debris is cleared away and does not collect on the impeller vanes.

ii) The nature of the conveyed medium poses significant

challenges to the continuous operation of the pump. Of particular concern is the clogging of the impeller by debris in the pumped medium including but not limited to long rags, fibers, and like debris which are able to wrap around the impeller vanes, stick to the center of the vanes or hub, or lodge within the spaces between the impeller and the housing.

iii) The aggressive self-cleaning wear plate shall have

integral laser cut notches and grooves in combination with a “tooth” designed to disturb and dislodge any solids which might otherwise remain on the impeller in dynamic operation. Wearplate is designed to constantly


and effectively clear the eye of the impeller without the use of blades or cutters.

3. Rotating Assembly: A rotating assembly, which includes impeller,

shaft, mechanical shaft seal, lip seals, bearings, seal plate and bearing housing must be removable as a single unit without disturbing the pump casing or piping. Design shall incorporate the following features:

a. Seal plate and bearing housing shall be cast iron Class 30.

Separate oil filled cavities, vented to atmosphere, shall be provided for shaft seal and bearings. Cavities must be cooled by the liquid pumped. Three lip seals will prevent leakage of oil.

i) The bearing cavity shall have an oil level sight gauge

and fill plug check valve. The clear sight gauge shall provide easy monitoring of the bearing cavity oil level and condition of oil without removal of the fill plug check valve. The check valve shall vent the cavity but prevent introduction of moist air to the bearings.

ii) The seal cavity shall have an oil level sight gauge and

fill/vent plug. The clear sight gauge shall provide easy monitoring of the seal cavity oil level and condition of oil without removal of the fill/vent plug.

iii) Double lip seal shall provide an atmospheric path

providing positive protection of bearings, with capability for external drainage monitoring.

b. The impeller shall be ductile iron, two-vaned, semi-open,

nonclog, with integral pump out vanes on the back shroud. Impeller shall thread onto the pump shaft and be secured with a lockscrew and conical washer.

c. Impeller shaft shall be AISI 17-4 pH stainless steel. d. Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or tapered roller type of

proper size and design to withstand all radial and thrust loads expected during normal operation. Bearings shall be oil lubricated from a dedicated reservoir. Pump designs which use the same oil to lubricate the bearings and shaft seal shall not be acceptable.


e. Shaft seal shall be oil lubricated mechanical type. The

stationary and rotating seal faces shall be tungsten titanium carbide alloy. Each mating surface shall be lapped to one-half light band flatness (5.8 millionths of an inch), as measured by an optical flat under monochromatic light. The stationary seal seat shall be double floating by virtue of a dual O-ring design; an external O-ring secures the stationary seat to the seal plate, and an internal O-ring holds the faces in alignment during periods of mechanical or hydraulic shock (loads which cause shaft deflection, vibration, and axial/radial movement). Elastomers shall be Viton. Cage and spring to be AISI 316 stainless steel. Seal shall be oil lubricated from a dedicated reservoir. The same oil shall not lubricate both shaft seal and shaft bearings. Seal shall be warranted in accordance with requirements listed under PART 1 - GENERAL of this section.

f. Pusher bolt capability to assist in removal of rotating

assembly. Pusher bolt threaded holes shall be sized to accept same cap screws as used for retaining rotating assembly.

g. Adjustment of the impeller face clearance (distance between

impeller and wear plate) shall be accomplished by external means.

i) Clearances shall be maintained by using external

shims between the casing ring of the rotation assembly and the pump casing itself. Shims will be of various sizes to allow precise adjustment of this clearance. The clearance can be measured by removing the cleanout cover on the suction head.

ii) Clearance adjustment which requires movement of the

shaft only, thereby adversely affecting seal working length or impeller back clearance, shall not be acceptable.

h. The suction check valve shall be molded Buna-N with integral

steel and nylon reinforcement. A blow-out center shall protect pump casing from hydraulic shock or excessive pressure. Removal or installation of the check valve must be accomplished through the cover plate opening, without disturbing the suction piping. Sole function of check valve


shall be to save energy by eliminating need to re-prime after each pumping cycle.

i. Spool flanges shall be one-piece cast iron, class 30 fitted to

suction and/or discharge ports. Each spool shall have one 1-1/4" NPT and one 1/4" NPT tapped hole with pipe plugs for mounting gauges or other equipment.

2.02 DRIVE UNIT

A. Motors:

1. Pump motors shall be 40 HP, horizontal ODP, 1750 RPM, NEMA design B with cast iron frame with copper windings, induction type,Inverter Duty rated meeting NEMA MG 1, Part 31, with class F insulation and 1.15 Service Factor (1.0 Service Factor for Inverter Duty Rating) for normal starting torque and low starting current characteristics, suitable for continuous service. The motors shall not overload at the design condition or at any head in the operating range as specified. Motors shall be suitable for operation using the utility power available specified in PART 1 of this section.

2. Motors shall be tested in accordance with provisions of IEEE Std 112, Method B.

B. Drive Transmission:

1. Power to pumps shall be transmitted via V-belt drive assemblies. The sheave/belt combination shall provide the speed ratio needed to achieve the specified pump operating conditions.

2. Each drive assembly shall utilize at least two V-belts providing a

minimum combined safety factor of 1.5. Single belt drives or systems with a safety factor of less than 1.5 are not acceptable. Computation of safety factors shall be based on performance data published by the drive manufacturer.

3. The pump manufacturer shall submit power transmission

calculations which document the following: a. Ratio of pump/motor speed.

b. Pitch diameter of driver and driven sheaves.

c. Number of belts required per drive.


d. Theoretical horsepower transmitted per belt, based on vendor's data.

e. Center distance between pump and motor shafts.

f. Arc-length correction factor applied to theoretical horsepower transmitted.

g. Service factor applied to established design horsepower.

h. Safety factor ratio of power transmitted/brake horsepower required.

4. Pump drives shall be enclosed on all sides by a guard constructed of

fabricated steel or combination of materials including expanded, perforated, or solid sheet metal. No opening to a rotating member shall exceed 1/2”.

a. Guards must be completely removal without interference from

any unit component and shall be securely fastened and braced to the unit base.

b. Metal shall be free from burrs and sharp edges. Structural joints shall be continuously welded. Rivet spacing on panels shall not exceed 5”. Tack welds shall not exceed 4” spacing.

c. The guard shall be finished in accordance with Section 3, Color Definitions of ANSI 253.1; Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install, level, align, and lubricate pump(s) as indicated on project drawings.

Installation must be in accordance with written instructions supplied by the manufacturer at time of delivery.

B. Suction pipe connections are vacuum tight. Fasteners at all pipe

connections must be tight. Install pipe with supports and thrust blocks to prevent strain and vibration on pump piping. Install and secure all service lines (level control, air release valve or pump drain lines) as required in wet well.

C. Check motor and control data plates for compatibility to site voltage. Install

and test the station ground prior to connecting line voltage to control panel.


D. Prior to applying electrical power to any motors or control equipment, check all wiring for tight connection. Verify that protective devices (fuses and circuit breakers) conform to project design documents. Manually operate circuit breakers and switches to ensure operation without binding. Open all circuit breakers and disconnects before connecting utility power. Verify line voltage, phase sequence and ground before actual start-up.

E. After all anchor bolts, piping and control connections are installed,

completely fill the grout dam in the pump station base with non-shrink grout.

3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING A. Quality Control: The manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified

technician for two (2) 8-hour days to inspect the installation and provide start-up services and training of the Owner’s personnel.

B. Field Testing:

1. Prior to acceptance by owner, an operational test of all pumps, drives, and control systems shall be conducted to determine if the installed equipment meets the purpose and intent of the specifications. Tests shall demonstrate that all equipment is electrically, mechanically, structurally, and otherwise acceptable, it is safe and in optimum working condition, and conforms to the specified operating characteristics.

2. After construction debris and foreign material has been removed form the wet well, contractor shall supply clear water volume adequate to operate station through several pumping cycles. Observe and record operation of pumps, suction and discharge gage readings, ampere draw, pump controls, and liquid level controls. Check calibration of all instrumentation equipment, test manual control devices, and automatic control systems. Be alert to any undue noise, vibration or other operational problems.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean grease, oil, or any other debris from the exterior surfaces of the

selfpriming centrifugal pumps.

3.04 SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) complete set of manufacturer recommended spare parts for each pump, and shall convey the spare parts to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

JUNE 2019 Project # 18.08502 116300 - Page 1

SECTION 116300 REFRIGERATED COMPOSITE SAMPLER PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install fiberglass refrigerated composite samplers at the locations shown on the drawings, as specified herein.

B. Sample shall be insulated and heat traced for cold weather conditions.

C. Unless otherwise noted, all materials and equipment supplied under this Section shall be new, of good quality, and in good condition.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The refrigerated sampler shall be manufactured by a reputable company

with at least five (5) years experience in manufacturing refrigerated wastewater samplers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”. The shop drawings shall include installation drawings, materials of construction, and catalogue cut sheets for all materials being supplied.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Section 017820 “Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The fiberglass refrigerated sampler shall be Model 5800 with a flow-through sample chamber as manufactured by ISCO Environmental, equivalent Hach Sigma sampler, or approved equal. Manufacturers are listed only to denote the quality standard of product desired, general style, type, character and do not restrict bidders to a specific manufacturer. The listing of a manufacturer does not imply that their standard equipment will be acceptable. Should any of the named manufacturers above have any deviations or exceptions from this specification, a letter stating the issues must be received by the Engineer by the date and time listed in the Instructions to Bidders for prequalification submittals to receive consideration. Any approved exceptions or deviations will be addressed by Addendum only.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The samplers shall be delivered, stored and handled to protect the units

and in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free of defects from

workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year. 1.07 MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIER INFORMATION

A. Manufacturer Nameplate: A manufacturer’s nameplate shall be securely and permanently mounted to each individual piece of equipment furnished under this Section. The nameplate shall be constructed of a durable, non-corrosive material. Critical information shall be clearly engraved or otherwise permanently stamped on the nameplate, and shall be fully legible. The information contained on the manufacturer nameplate shall include at least the following:

1. Manufacturer’s Serial Number

2. Name, address and telephone number of equipment manufacturer

3. Model and/or Part Number, including pump impeller sizes, when applicable

4. Performance Criteria (i.e., capacity, design point, etc.)

5. Motor size, speed and voltage

6. Enclosure Type or Rating

7. Any other pertinent information

Note: All equipment shall include a nameplate with a manufacturer serial number validating the equipment as new. Failure to meet these requirements will be cause for rejection of the equipment.

B. Supplier and Service Information: A durable nameplate, stamp or sticker

shall be adhered to each individual piece of equipment containing the name, address, and telephone number of the local business that supplied the equipment, and the name, address and telephone number of the local business that can provide service and replacement parts for the equipment. A 24-hour emergency service telephone number should also be included.


PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Refrigerator Sample Compartment Capacity: 2-1/2 gallon glass container.

B. Liquid Presence Detection: Non-wetted, non-conductive sensor automatically compensates for changes in head height.

C. Controller: NEMA 4X

D. Sample Frequency: Selectable in hours and minutes between consecutive samples in 1 minute increments up to 99 hours 59 minutes, or from 1 to 9,999 flow pulses in single pulse intervals.

E. Flow Meter Signal Requirements: 4-20 mA analog.

F. Rinse Cycles: Suction line automatically rinsed with source liquid before sample collection up to 3 rinses.

G. Sample Retries: Sampling cycle automatically repeated if sample not obtained, up to 3 retries.

H. Intake Purge: Adjustable air purge before and after each sample.

I. Diagnostics: Tests RAM, ROM, and pump

J. Number of Samples to Shut Off: 200 samples.

K. Sample Volume: 10 to 9,990 ml in 1 ml increments.

L. Suction Tubing: 20’-0”, 3/8” ID Teflon lined tubing.

M. Suction Lift: 26’-0” maximum

N. Pumping Rate at 3 ft Head: 3500 Ml per minute.

O. Operational Temperature Range: (-)20° F to 120° F.

P. Power Requirements: 120 V, AC 60 Hz.

Q. Maximum Compressor Current Requirement: 20 amps

R. Sample Temperature Range: 32° F to 46° F.

S. Recovery Time: 5 minutes for door open 1 minute (typical)

T. Controller Internal Lithium Battery Life: 5 years minimum.

U. Provide 2” diameter PVC line from discharge header to the flow-through chamber for Sampler and a 3” diameter PVC line from the flow-through chamber to the influent channel for the secondary clarifiers. PVC lines and ball valve to be provided and installed by Contractor and routed as described.


PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The sampler units shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings

in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer that the units

are operating as specified. 3.03 SPARE PARTS A. The manufacturer shall furnish a one (1) year supply of recommended spare

parts for each unit. The spare parts shall include all accessories needed to operate the units for one (1) full year. The Contractor shall convey the spare parts to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

September 2019 Project # 18.08502 260519-Page 1 of 8

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 3. Armored cable, Type AC, rated 600 V or less. 4. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. PV: Photovoltaic.

B. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

C. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking

according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

D. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

E. Shield:

1. VFC Cable: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation (XLPE), dual spirally wrapped copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires, and rated for 2k volts.

2.02 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.

B. Standards:


2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking


C. Circuits:

1. Single circuit.


D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

E. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

F. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

G. Armor: Aluminum, interlocked.

H. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.03 ARMORED CABLE, TYPE AC

A. Description: A factory assembly of insulated current-carrying conductors with or without an equipment grounding conductor in an overall metallic sheath.

B. Standards:


2. RoHS compliant. 3. Comply with UL 4. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking


C. Circuits:

1. Single circuit. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

E. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

F. Conductor Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2. Comply with UL 83.

G. Armor: Aluminum, interlocked.

2.04 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and


labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: Two hole with long barrels. 3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.


G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.


3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent

conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include


notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken

to achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION


This Page Intentionally Blank


SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Low-voltage control cabling. 2. Control-circuit conductors. 3. Identification products.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. RoHS compliant.

2.02 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

2.03 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in raceway.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.

B. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to terminal. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points.

5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install network cabling and control wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages.

6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.

10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles.


12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables.

13. Provide strain relief. 14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. Do not

bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations.

15. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.

C. Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 271513

"Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point

of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. 2. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw

terminals. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.




4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

3.04 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified with a tag for future use.

3.05 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.

3.06 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with TIA-607-B and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.07 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-606-B; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969.

C. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number-coded identification tag. Each wire shall have a unique tag.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination, but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in its "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in its "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1) Ground rods.


2) Ground rings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in

diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 6. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.03 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.


C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron.

G. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

J. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

K. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.

L. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

M. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal two-piece clamp.

N. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

O. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. b. Listed for direct burial.

2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor rated for direct burial, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 12 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when

indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.02 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs.


7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

D. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least

one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.


E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Installbonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and

mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper

jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to

prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.




1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints. 5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-

actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.

6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.


1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.


A. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems.

1. Hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Slotted support systems. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages

and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.



A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface.

1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316. 3. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.


4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM F 3125/F 3125M,Grade A325.

6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 111.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.


2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and

expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with

lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:

Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.04 CONCRETE BASES

A. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.


3.05 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.



B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 3. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with

UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 5. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.

6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.


2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 4. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 5. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 6. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying

with ASTM D 3485. 7. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

B. Nonmetallic Fittings:

1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 2. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or

tubing type and material.

a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.03 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Engineer.

2.04 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.


E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 4X Stainless Steel with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

I. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: ARC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: ARC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X Stainless

Steel.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.


3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following:

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: ARC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel in damp or

wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.

Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds [120 deg F].

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.


C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.

D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.

E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

F. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

G. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

H. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.

I. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

L. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not

terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.


N. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

P. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

S. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

T. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

U. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

V. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment.


5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points.

6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

X. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.


BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install 0sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.06 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Solid-bottom Enclosed Cable Tray. 2. Warning signs.



1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

2. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to sides of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling

structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding

manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.


1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer who is licensed in the state where Project is located and who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAY

A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding.

1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.


B. Sizes and Configurations: 1. Interior Cable Tray: Minimum 24” wide and 6” deep, with 9” rung spacing,

and capable of supporting the load required. 2. Exterior Cable Tray: Minimum 36” wide and 4” deep, solid bottom with

enclosed top, and capable of supporting the load required.

C. Material: Aluminum.

2.03 SOLID-BOTTOM ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Metallic cable tray systems. a. Eaton B-Line. b. MP Husky. c. P-W Ind.

2. Cable tray conduit and ground clamps and brackets.

a. Eaton B-Line. b. P-W Ind. c. O.Z. Gedney. d. Thomas & Betts.

B. Description:

1. Configuration: Two longitudinal side rails with a nonventilated continuous bottom.

2. Width: 36 inches. 3. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches. 4. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet, except where shorter lengths are

required to facilitate tray assembly. 5. No portion of the continuous bottom shall protrude below the bottom plane

of side rails. 6. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load,

with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1.

7. Fitting Minimum Radius: 24 inches. 8. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 10A. 9. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.

a. Splice connectors shall be of the high pressure bolted type with a minimum of four bolts per connector.

b. Splice connector design shall be universal for use on straight sections and fittings.

c. Resistance across any splice connection shall not exceed 330 micro-ohms.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=12516

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457097922


10. Splice-Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray.

11. Covers: Solid type made of same materials and with same finishes as cable tray.

C. Materials and Finishes:

1. Aluminum:

a. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts.

b. Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

2.04 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.05 WARNING SIGNS

A. Warning Sign 1: 1-1/2-inch-high, black letters on yellow background, with legend "WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."

B. Warning Sign 2: 1-1/2-inch high, black letters on orange background, with legend “480 VOLTS”.

C. Warning Sign Placement: Each warning sign shall be placed on cable tray at 20’ intervals.

D. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Install cable tray and support systems according to NEMA VE 2.

B. Install cable tray as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

C. Install cable tray, so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square-neck carriage bolts and locknuts.

F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.

G. Place supports, so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules, and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of tray rungs.

H. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

I. Support assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

J. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.

K. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure.

L. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed recommended dimensions. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

M. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

N. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

O. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.


P. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing, or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

Q. Install permanent covers and cover clamps, if used, after installing cable.

R. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.

S. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.

3.02 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

C. Cable trays with single-conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch intervals. The grounding conductor shall be sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors," and Article 392, "Cable Trays."

D. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."

3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches.

C. Cables that pass from cable trays to other equipment shall be enclosed in properly sized and supported aluminum conduit.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2.



A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements.

2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

4. Verify that there are no intruding items, such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment, in the cable tray.

5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When

found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray

grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 3. Handholes and boxes. 4. Manholes.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.



1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components.

2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement.

3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures.

4. Include warning tape. 5. Include warning planks.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:


a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. e. Include Ladder details. f. Include grounding details. g. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and

lifting irons, and sumps. h. Include joint details.

2. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include cover design. d. Include grounding details. e. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in

and lifting irons.


A. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.


1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is 36 inches (900 mm) below ground surface unless a higher water table is noted on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

2.02 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.


B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.03 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-80 and Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service. 4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral

closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 5. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same

material as enclosure.

a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches (300 mm). b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to

provide closure.

6. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.


7. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.05 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral

closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and

having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of

0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, As indicated for each service. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with

insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


2.06 PRECAST MANHOLES

A. Comply with ASTM C 858.

B. Structural Design Loading: Comply with requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

C. Precast Manholes: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

D. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

1. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

2. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

3. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

E. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

F. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 3-inch (75-mm) PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors 2 inches (50 mm) from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

G. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

2.07 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES

A. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 26 inches (660 mm).

a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in paved areas.


2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.

a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less.

3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those of roof opening.

a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. (60 L) where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

b. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic or rubber conforming to ASTM C 990. Install sealing material according to the sealant manufacturers' printed instructions.

B. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.

C. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt.

1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000-lbf (58-kN) minimum tension.

D. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening.

1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf (180-kN) shear and 60,000-lbf (270-kN) tension.

E. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) minimum at base.

1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf (53 kN) minimum.

F. Ground Rod Sleeve: 3-inch (75-mm), PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors 2 inches (50 mm) from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

G. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch (13-mm) bolt, 5300-lbf (24-kN) rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf (30-kN) rated shear strength.


H. Cable Rack Assembly: Steel, hot-dip galvanized, except insulators.

1. Stanchions: T-section or channel; 2-1/4-inch (56-mm) nominal size; punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) centers for cable-arm attachment.

2. Arms: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm) with 450-lb (204-kg) minimum capacity to 18 inches (450 mm) with 250-lb (114-kg) minimum capacity. Arms shall have slots along full length for cable ties and be arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any vertical location on stanchions.

3. Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms.

I. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

J. Portable Manhole Ladders: UL-listed, heavy-duty fiberglass specifically designed for portable use for access to electrical manholes. Minimum length equal to distance from deepest manhole floor to grade plus 36 inches (900 mm). One required.

K. Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 lbf (270 N) and greater. Two required.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification, complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Engineer if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.02 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in concrete unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Underground Ducts Crossing Walks Parking Areas, Driveways and Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

D. Ducts for Electrical Feeders over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in concrete unless otherwise indicated.

3.03 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.


3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.

5. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

B. Manholes: Precast concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.04 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to the "Cutting and Patching" Article in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.05 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48


inches (1200 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

E. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch (19 mm).

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

F. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

H. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in empty ducts.

I. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches (75 mm) wider than duct bank on each side.

3. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.

4. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.


5. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts.

7. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

8. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

9. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

10. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on each side of duct bank.

11. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (15-mm) reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

12. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at


exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

J. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

3. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers.

4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like

services and 6 inches (150 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and

equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

8. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.


a. Place minimum 3 inches (75 mm) of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) above top level of duct bank.

b. Place minimum 6 inches (150 mm) of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct bank.

K. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated

with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches (375 mm) below finished grade.

2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 24” below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with

finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

D. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings, to support cast-iron frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening.


Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for frame to chimney.

E. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Section 071113 "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts are connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

F. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

G. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (97 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line, 24” below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.


G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep).

3.08 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch- (150-mm-) long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.


2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.04 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

3. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

D. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

F. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION

September 2019 Project # 18.08502 260548.16-Page 1 of 6

SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Restraint channel bracings. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Seismic-restraint accessories. 4. Adhesive anchor bolts.


1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.



1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the State Building Code unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC:

III.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 3.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods [Ss, 0.2 Second]: .218g.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period [S1]: .081g.

2.02 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS

A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings.

C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.


2.04 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:


1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.

5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.



A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Engineer, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Engineer's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Engineer.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

B. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.

2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs.



B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.02 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type (‘Power’ or ‘Control’).

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 240-V Single Phase Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Neutral: White

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray

4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.

C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:


1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

E. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2.03 LABELS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.

B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.

C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.

1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location.

1. Minimum Nominal Size:

a. See detail sheet E-501 for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.04 BANDS AND TUBES

A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.

B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.


2.05 TAPES AND STENCILS

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

D. Underground-Line Warning Tape:

1. Tape:

a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

2. Color and Printing:

a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5.

b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE".

c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

3. Tag: Type Control:

a. Pigmented polyolefin, bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

b. Width: 3 inches. c. Thickness: 4 mils. d. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.. e. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf and 2500 psi.

4. Tag: Type Power:

a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film


that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

b. Width: 3 inches. c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.06 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.07 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs,punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.

C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets

in corners for mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at

applicable equipment.


2.08 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.


F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.

G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Cable identification shall completely encircle cable. Conduit identification shall be placed so as to be visible on approach. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.

H. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "POWER." 2. "CONTROL."

I. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

J. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

K. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

L. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

M. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

N. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

O. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

P. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.


1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

Q. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions.

R. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

S. Metal Tags:

1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using general-purpose cable ties.

T. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high.

U. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:


2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

V. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:


2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

W. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.


2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

D. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "POWER." 2. "CONTROL."

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify the phase.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation.

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.


I. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

J. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive labels.

1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or

cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of an engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on

Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power-transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks.


t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment. w. Raceways.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 260591 INTEGEGRATED POWER ASSEMBLY (IPA)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The specification covers requirements applicable to the provision of Integrated Power Assembly (IPA). The IPA shall be environmentally controlled and shall consist of a coordinated grouping of electrical power and control equipment as indicated on any accompanying data sheets and/or drawings. Any data sheets, drawings, or any other related documents accompanying this specification shall be considered a part of this specification.

B. The supplier shall furnish, install, interconnect and test the equipment and materials specified herein, as well as any equipment specified in any related documents.

C. Site conditions shall be shown on the data sheet(s). These conditions shall be considered when sizing and designing equipment and structures.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. All materials, equipment and labor supplied by the supplier shall be in strict compliance with the statutes, codes and standards listed herein. Where conflicts exist between statutes, codes and standards, the more stringent requirement shall prevail. Applicable statutes, codes and standards are as listed below:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

4. American Welding Society (AWS)

a. AWSD1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

6. National Electric Code (NEC)

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

8. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL)

9. International Building Code (IBC)


10. State Modular Building Code Programs where applicable

1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL

A. The supplier shall provide the following submittals:

1. Any quality plans, forms, or procedures deemed necessary by the customer.

2. Structural drawings including:

a. General notes.

b. Building plan view.

c. Building base skid detail.

d. Building elevations.

e. Stairs and landings details.

f. Certified structural calculations.

3. Electrical drawings including:

a. Electrical notes.

b. Building electrical plan, showing conduit, cable tray, subfloor wireway, and any other means of wiring transit. Drawings shall also include conduit fill.

c. Building services wiring diagrams.

d. Grounding system plan.

e. Interconnection wiring diagrams.

1.04 SUBMITTALS – FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process

2. Wiring diagrams

3. Certified structural calculations

4. Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions

5. Seismic certification as specified

1.05 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. The IPA shall be manufactured under an established autonomous quality assurance program. The supplier shall have a designated quality assurance (QA) manager.

1. The successful bidder shall be prepared to submit for customer approval, any and/or all quality plans, forms, and procedures applicable to the manufacturer of the IPA

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly.

B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an


acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INTEGRATED POWER ASSEMBLY (IPA)

A. The IPA shall be designed and constructed for outdoor use, under wind and seismic load conditions per the IBC or State guidelines for the job site.

B. The building shall be 10’ x 23’ with an interior ceiling height of 11’.

C. The building and all components mounted thereon shall be designed for, and anchored sufficiently for, transportation to the job site.

D. The skid shall be of concrete or of welded construction.

1. Welded construction shall utilize ASTM-A36 minimum structural steel members, sized and arranged for proper strength, and able to withstand the stress and loads which will result when lifting the complete factory fabricated and equipped assemblies. Welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWSD1.1. All welding shall be performed by welders certified for the work being performed. Suppliers shall be prepared to show welders’ certificates.

a. Deflection shall be L/240. The building shall be suitable for installation on a concrete pad or on piers.

b. The skid shall be equipped with two (2) stainless steel ground pads located at opposite corners of the skid with provisions for NEMA hole pattern lug.

c. The skid shall be provided with a minimum of 8 mils mastic undercoating.

E. The floor shall be a minimum of 1/4-inch H.R. ASTM-A36 minimum smooth steel plate, welded to the perimeter and longitudinal and/or transverse structural members of the skid. The floor loading shall be no less than 250 PSF.

1. The floor shall be provided with gasketed floor cutouts where required for power and control cable entry/exit from the equipment. The cutouts shall be provided with 12 gauge galvanized or painted coverplates.

F. Building construction:

1. Building walls, roof and ceiling shall be fabricated from G90 galvanized steel. Exterior walls, exterior roof and interior ceiling shall be self-framing, interlocking design, with maximum panel width of 16-inch, or framed construction with maximum panel width of 36-inch.

2. Exterior walls shall be minimum of 18-gauge thickness for self-framing and interlocking design, or 24-gauge thickness framed construction design, but rated to withstand the loading requirements of the job site.

3. Interior walls shall be constructed of six-inch “ribbed” panel construction, bolted to adjoining walls, that is minimum 18-gauge thickness for self-framing and interlocking design, or 22-gauge thickness framed construction design , but rated to withstand the loading requirements of the job site.

4. Exterior roof shall be a minimum of 18-gauge thickness for self-framing and interlocking design, or 24-gauge thickness framed construction design, but rated to withstand the loading requirements of the job site. The roof shall be sloped


away from the personnel doors, where feasible. Gutters and downspouts shall be provided when the roof slope is directly over personnel or rear access equipment doors.

G. For a building which must be shipped in multiple shipping sections, miscellaneous NEMA 1 junction boxes will be provided at the shipping splits for easy breakdown of the building wiring for shipment and reconnection at the job site. Prior to shipment the open end/sides of each shipping section will be crated (weatherproofed) for transit to the job site. The crating must be performed by a company recognized and experienced in the trade which includes the IPA manufacturer.

H. Where wall bulkhead penetrations are required, the cutouts shall be completely framed with 1/4” aluminum cover plates with neoprene gasket.

I. All fastening hardware shall be zinc plated, stainless steel or aluminum.. Welding of galvanized steel and rivets shall not be the primary method of exterior fastening. Rivets can be used for mounting non-load-bearing trim members.

J. The building shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) entrance doors. The doors shall be double wall construction, with brushed aluminum panic hardware with cylinder lock and thumb latch, brushed aluminum automatic closure with built-in hold open device, prime coat or stainless steel hinges, threshold, weather-stripping, drip shields/water flashing, “DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP OUT” sign, and a 12-inch removable transom above the equipment door, when required. The personnel door shall be 36-inch x 84-inch. The equipment door shall be 48-inch x 84-inch.

1. When specified, the supplier shall provide landings and stairs for the building. The stairs shall be built in compliance with the UBC code, and shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication

K. For equipment requiring rear access, the supplier shall provide 14-guage minimum galvanized steel, gasketed and hinged equipment rear access doors, with 3-point latching system with galvanized padlockable handles, “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE” sign, and drip shields/water flashing.

L. The walls, roof and floor shall be fully insulated, with a minimum of R-11 insulation. The walls and roof shall be provided with fiberglass batt type insulation, minimum R-11. The floor shall be provided with polyurethane spray foam insulation, minimum R-6.

M. The building shall be provided with a paint system per the following:

1. The skid shall be prepared to the appropriate SSPC standard (SSPC-1, SSPC-2, SSPC-3) for removal of rust and scale prior to painting. A 2-3 mil application of Zinc rich primer shall be provided

2. The floor shall be provided with a 2-3 mil application of “Red” epoxy iron oxide primer, followed by a 2-3 mil application of ANSI-61 gray epoxy, with a non-skid finish

3. The exterior and interior of the building shall be provided with a 0.3-0.6 mil application of a vinyl wash primer, followed by a 2-3 mil application of white epoxy paint

N. The building shall be provided with a HVAC system, sized and provided by the supplier, considering the ambient site conditions, the dimensions of the building, the solar heating of the building, and the heat generated by the equipment within the building. The system shall be designed such that the sensible cooling capacity, NOT the total cooling capacity, will maintain an ambient temperature within the building of


between 55°F winter and 80°F summer at design conditions. The system shall be provided with an electronic, automatic changeover thermostat. When the building is specified to be located in a classified environment, the supplier shall provide an HVAC/Pressurization system in strict compliance with NFPA 496 requirements. In the event of a classified installation, the supplier shall also provide all exterior electrical apparatuses and proper seals, which are rated for use in the environment in which the building shall be installed.

O. The supplier shall furnish all electrical distribution equipment necessary for the proper operation of building services within and without the building. The operating voltage of all distribution equipment shall be 240/120V, three-phase. The primary side of any distribution transformers shall be 480/277V, three-phase.

P. The building shall be provided with linear LED lighting fixtures, controlled via three-way wall switches to be located at each entry door. Provide enough fixtures to maintain 42 FT candles at the floor after all overhead hanging appliances are installed such as conduit or cable tray. Arrange lighting fixtures to avoid shadows at floor level.

Q. The building shall be provided with 125V, 20A interior duplex receptacles, number and placement as shown on sheet E-207.

R. The building shall be provided with 125V, 20A exterior duplex weatherproof, GFCI receptacles, number and placement as shown on sheet E-207. An additional exterior GFCI weatherproof receptacle shall be located within 25 feet, and on the same exterior wall as any HVAC equipment.

S. The building shall be provided with LED exterior lights at each entry door, controlled via photocell and H-O-A switch.

T. All wiring shall be type THWN, #12 AWG minimum for power circuits, minimum #14 AWG for control circuits. For all control interconnection wiring, both ends of the wire shall be provided with polyolefin sleeve type wire markers.

U. EMT conduit shall be utilized for interior applications. RGS conduit shall be utilized for outdoor applications.

V. Cable tray shall be aluminum, 6-inch high, 24-inch wide, with 9-inch rung spacing. All fittings shall have a minimum of 12-inch radius.

W. 1/4-inch x 2-inch copper ground bar running the length of the building shall be provided, mounted approximately 6-inch above floor and connected to each end of the equipment ground bar. A #4/0 green insulated copper ground cable shall be provided from the ground bar to the exterior ground pads. A green insulated copper ground wire/cable will be provided from the ground bar to all auxiliary electrical equipment per NEC Table 250-95.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. The following testing and inspection shall be performed on the building:

1. Continuity checks of all wiring installed by the supplier

2. Operational check of all supplier furnished and installed electrical apparatuses


3. Switchgear and Motor Control Center shipping sections’ bus shall be re-spliced, torqued and meggered.

4. A certified test report shall be provided by the supplier’s Quality Assurance Manager

5. If necessary, secondary control power shall be provided for customer use. Available control power voltages shall be 240/120V, 3-phase.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For transformers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.


1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Aluminum.

F. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.03 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

I. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

J. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: As specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections. 4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated

voltage connections. 5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the

rated voltage connections. 6. Applied and induced tensile tests. 7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage. 8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground. b. Low-voltage to ground. c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

2. Brace wall-mounted transformers as specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports. Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.



A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic-grade panelboards.


1. Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits" for surge protection device detailed requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.


4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results

that comply with requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above panelboards is complete. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 5 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 feet.


B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 2000 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that is supported by walls, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. NEMA 250, Type 12, painted steel.


2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom only.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment

grounding conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.03 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.


C. Mains: As indicated.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: As indicated.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.05 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS.

2.06 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared x t response.


4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials. c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with control system.

e. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

f. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.

g. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

h. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

i. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

j. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

k. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

B. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as directed by the Engineer.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components:

1. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. 2. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3. Reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers. 4. VFDs. 5. Feeder-tap units. 6. TVSS. 7. Instrumentation. 8. Auxiliary devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

B. CPT: Control power transformer.

C. DDC: Direct digital control.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting.

F. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. LED: Light-emitting diode.

I. MCC: Motor-control center.


J. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

K. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

L. NC: Normally closed.

M. NO: Normally open.

N. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

O. PCC: Point of common coupling.

P. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

Q. PT: Potential transformer.

R. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

S. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

T. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

U. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

V. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

W. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

X. VFD: Variable-frequency drive.


A. Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and operating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval and production drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus

structure and each unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each

installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller.

3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed

unit.

C. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFD input and out filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFD to specified levels.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For MCCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Product Certificates: For each MCC, from manufacturer.


C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

F. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules.

6. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths.

B. Handle MCCs according to the following:

1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts."

2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers."

C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C).

3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's

written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.


C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control sequences, and duty cycle of motors and loads.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace TVSS and VFDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.

2. Rockwell Automation, Inc.

B. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845.

2.02 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

A. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC.

B. Controller Units: Combination controller units.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=2055




1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

2. Equip units in Type B and Type C MCCs with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections.

C. Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.

D. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.

E. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare."

2.03 INCOMING MAINS

A. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

B. Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.




a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.


b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

e. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.

f. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

g. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.04 COMBINATION CONTROLLERS

A. Full-Voltage Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

2. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

a. Configuration: Nonreversing.

B. Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers:

1. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: Comply with UL 508.

2. Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: An integrated unit with power SCRs, heat sink, microprocessor logic board, door-mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and overload relay; suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, polyphase, medium-induction motors.

a. Configuration: Standard duty; nonreversible. b. Starting Mode: Voltage ramping, current limit, torque control, torque

control with voltage boost; field selectable. c. Stopping Mode: Coast to stop, adjustable torque deceleration; field

selectable. d. Shorting (Bypass) Contactor: Operates automatically when full

voltage is applied to motor, and bypasses the SCRs. Solid-state controller protective features shall remain active when the shorting contactor is in the bypass mode.

e. Shorting and Input Isolation Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type; manufacturer's standard operating voltage, matching control


power or line voltage, depending on contactor size and line-voltage rating. Provide coil transient suppressors.

f. Logic Board: Identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes, with environmental protective coating.

g. Adjustable acceleration-rate control using voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting torque control with up to 400 percent current limitation for 20 seconds.

h. SCR bridge shall consist of at least two SCRs per phase, providing stable and smooth acceleration without external feedback from the motor or driven equipment.

i. Keypad, front accessible; for programming the controller parameters, functions, and features; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following functions:

j. Adjusting motor full-load amperes, as a percentage of the controller's rating.

k. Adjusting current limitation on starting, as a percentage of the motor full-load current rating.

l. Adjusting linear acceleration and deceleration ramps, in seconds. m. Initial torque, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. n. Adjusting torque limit, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. o. Adjusting maximum start time, in seconds. p. Adjusting voltage boost, as a percentage of the nominal supply

voltage. q. Selecting stopping mode, and adjusting parameters. r. Selecting motor thermal-overload protection class between 5 and 30. s. Activating and de-activating protection modes. t. Selecting or activating communications modes. u. Digital display, front accessible; for showing motor, controller, and

fault status; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following:

v. Controller Condition: Ready, starting, running, stopping. w. Motor Condition: Amperes, voltage, power factor, power, and thermal

state. x. Fault Conditions: Controller thermal fault, motor overload alarm and

trip, motor underload, overcurrent, shorted SCRs, line or phase loss, phase reversal, and line frequency over or under normal.

y. Controller Diagnostics and Protection: z. Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring SCR

and motor thermal characteristics, and providing controller overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

aa. Protection from line-side reverse phasing; line-side and motor-side phase loss; motor jam, stall, and underload conditions; and line frequency over or under normal.


bb. Input isolation contactor that opens when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component, or when the motor is stopped.

3. Remote Output Features:

a. All outputs prewired to terminal blocks. b. Form C status contacts that change state when controller is running. c. Form C alarm contacts that change state when a fault condition

occurs.

4. Optional Features:

a. Analog output for field-selectable assignment of motor operating characteristics; 4 to 20-mA dc.

b. Additional field-assignable Form C contacts for alarm outputs. c. Surge suppressors in solid-state power circuits providing three-

phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

C. Disconnecting Means and OCPDs:

1. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.

e. NO alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

D. Overload Relays:

1. Solid-State Overload Relays:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect

motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting. e. Analog communication module.


2. NO isolated overload alarm contact. 3. External overload reset push button.

E. Control Power:

1. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

2.05 VFDS

A. General Requirements for VFDs: 1. VFDs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

B. Application: Constant torque and variable torque.`

C. VFD Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."

2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."

3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Listed and labeled for single-phase use by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

E. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.


F. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFD input voltage rating.

2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFD frequency

rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any

load or speed condition. 6. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds for

variable torque loads and 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds for constant torque loads; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds.

7. Starting Torque: Minimum of 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 9. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 10. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection

braking.

G. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

H. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFDs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to a minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFD and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-

based thermal protection system for monitoring VFDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFD overtemperature and motor


overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault.

K. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

L. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

M. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFD input current rating. 2. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker

handle. 3. NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.06 VFD CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.


a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFD, local automatic control at VFD, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Total run time. 2. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFD door and connected to display VFD parameters, including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac). 11. Flow Meter output (gpm)

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 4- to 20-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of two programmable analog output signal(s) ( 4- to 20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz).

3. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of four programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached.


c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. Interface with SCADA System: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the SCADA system to monitor, control, and display VFD status and alarms. Allows VFD to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFD's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485. 2. Embedded Protocols for Network Communications: Echelon LonWorks,

Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus/Memobus; protocols accessible via the communications ports.

2.07 VFD LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit TDD at input terminals of VFDs to less than 5 percent and THD(V) to 3 percent. Provide at a minimum of a 5% DC choke link with surge suppression.

B. Output Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide output filtering, as required, to limit TDD and THD(V) at the defined PCC per IEEE 519. Provide a minimum of 3% load reactor for each drive.

C. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.

2.08 OPTIONAL VFD FEATURES

A. Sleep Function: Senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal and stops the motor. On an increase in speed-command signal deviation, VFD resumes normal operation.

B. Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the motor.

C. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

D. Remote digital operator kit.

E. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

F. Elapsed Time Meter.


2.09 FEEDER-TAP UNITS

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.




a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor material. c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

e. Communication Capability: Provide Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

g. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.10 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES

A. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating


matching or exceeding the MCC short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 2. Integral disconnect switch. 3. Redundant suppression circuits. 4. Redundant replaceable modules. 5. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and

ground bus. 6. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 7. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 8. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one NO and one NC, for

remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

9. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase

C. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 480-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V.

2.11 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential

terminals rated to 600 V. 3. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated

maximum accuracy tolerances:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.


h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.

4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

2.12 MCC CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from CPT.

B. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.13 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 12 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: Transformer, factory installed in MCC.

C. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

D. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R, non-walk-in aisle.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.

2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking.

E. Compartments: Modular; individualdoors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device.


F. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.

G. Wiring Spaces:

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.

2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.

2.14 AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered, lockable types; momentary contact unless otherwise indicated.

b. Pilot Lights: LED types. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

2. Elapsed-Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable.

B. Reversible NC/NO contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

G. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.


2.15 CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS

A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B.

B. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

C. Environmental Ratings:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C)

3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).

D. Vertical-Bus Continuous Rating: 600 A.

E. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating.

F. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

G. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.

H. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, tin plated.

I. Neutral Buses: 50 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

J. Ground Bus: Minimum size required by UL 845, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors.

K. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs:

1. Main Devices: Fixed mounted. 2. Controller Units: Drawout and fixed mounted. 3. Feeder-Tap Units: Drawout and fixed mounted. 4. Sections front and rear aligned.


L. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic MCC.

M. Pull Box on Top of an MCC:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Insulated bottom of fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable

drops into MCC. 5. Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support

cables, including those for future installation.

N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit.

O. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.


A. MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18.

B. VFD Testing: Test and inspect VFDs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFD while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for which the VFD is rated.

2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFDs according to operation of functions and features specified.

C. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 HARMONIC ANALYSIS STUDY

A. Perform a harmonic analysis study to identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFD input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at the defined PCC to specified levels.

B. Prepare a harmonic analysis study report complying with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.


E. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 4. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-

assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs.

3.05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's control systems. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


3.06 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Engineer before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated

in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.


b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

10. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.08 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Coordinate startup with related process systems startup and perform concurrently.

3. Program motor characteristics for process systems. 4. Coordinate installation with new VFDs in existing SCADA RTU.

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings.


C. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

D. Program microprocessors in VFDs for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as directed by the Engineer.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Weather-resistant receptacles. 4. Snap switches. 5. Pendant cord-connector devices. 6. Cord and plug sets.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.02 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.03 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.;Premium Industrial Grade Receptacles 20A-125V NEMA 5-20R - AH5362.

2. Hubbell; HBL5362.

3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour); 5362.

2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:


1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and

FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and

no longer provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices, Inc.; Commercial Specification Grade Combination GFCI with Nightlight 15A & 20A.

2. Hubbell; GFR5352L.

2.05 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.

2.06 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and

FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for

attaching external cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength,

galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.07 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.


2.08 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Three Way:


c. Four Way:


2.09 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished,

Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover,

and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.


8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers

used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with

digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is

unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance

at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION



DIVISION 26 APPENDIX – SAMPLE TEST REPORT FORMS

(GUIDE ONLY)

CIRCUIT BREAKER INSPECTION CHECKLIST

SECTION A - CUSTOMER DATA

1. PLANT/BUILDING 2. LOCATION 3. JOB NUMBER

4. EQUIPMENT 5. CIRCUIT DESIGNATION 6. DATE (YYYYMMDD)

7. TEST EQUIPMENT AND CALIBRATION DATE 8. TESTED BY

SECTION B - EQUIPMENT DATA

9. MANUFACTURER 10. STYLES/S.O. 11. VOLTAGE RATING 12. CURRENT RATING

13. CIRCUIT BREAKER SIZE AND INTERRUPTING RATING 14. EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION 15. FREQUENCY

SECTION C - VISUAL AND ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL INSPECTION

16. CHECK POINT COND* NOTES CHECK POINT COND* NOTES

EXTERIOR OF EQUIPMENT BRACING

COMPLETENESS OF ASSEMBLY PROPER PHASE CONNECTIONS AND

COLOR CODE

EXECTRICAL/MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS HAZARDOUS LOCATION

PROPER GROUNDING WORKING CLEARNACE

CONTACT RESISTANCE ANCHORAGE

AUXILIARY WIRING REFERENCE DRAWINGS

PROPER LUBERICATION CHECK MANUAL OPERATION OF CIRCUIT

BREAKER AND RELAYS

TIGHTNESS OF BOLTED CONNECTIONS RELAYS TESTED (ACCORDING TO

ELECTRICAL STUDY RECOMMENDATIONS)

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

SECTION D - ELECTRICAL TESTS

17. INSULATION RESISTANCE

@ V

A-GRD B-GRD C-GRD A-B B-C C-A

18. NOTES

1. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION TESTS/CHECKS SHOULD BE IMPLEMENTED.

*CONDITION: A=ACCEPTABLE; R=NEEDS REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT; C=CORRECTED; NA=NOT APPLICABLE **NOTE VALUE AND PHASING

POWER CABLE INSPECTION CHECKLIST




7. TEST EQUIPMENT TYPE/BRAND AND CALIBRATION DATE 8. TESTED BY



13. WET BULB TEMPERATURE 14. DRY BULB TEMPERATURE 15. ENCLOSURE TYPE 16. FREQUENCY



EXTERIOR OF CABLE RUN BRACING AND SUPPORTS

PROPER GROUNDING AT TERMINAL

LUGS TO BUS CHECK PROPER SIZE OF CABLE

REFERENCE EXISTING 1-LINE DIAGRAMS TIGHTNESS AND NEATNESS OF

TERMINATIONS

PROPER LUBRICATION ANCHORAGE

CHECK GROUNDING AT SPLICE JOINTS CHECK PROPER SIZE TERMINAL LUGS AND

MATERIAL

CHECK CABLE PHASE COLOR CODE CHECK CABLE PHASE COORDINATION

SHIELD CONTINUITY CABLE IDENTIFICATION



APPLIED VOLTAGE


19. NOTES

1. PERFORM HIGH POTENTIAL TESTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS OR MANUFACTURER(S) RECOMMENDATIONS.

*CONDITION: A=ACCEPTABLE; R=NEEDS REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT; C=CORRECTED; NA=NOT APPLICABLE

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER/SWITCHGEAR INSPECTION CHECKLIST



4. CIRCUIT DESIGNATION 5. CIRCUIT FED FROM 6. CIRCUIT FED TO 7. DATE (YYYYMMDD)

8. TEST EQUIPMENT TYPE/BRAND AND CALIBRATION DATE 9. ENCLOSURE TYPE 10. TESTED BY



15. INTERRUPTING RATING 16. BUS BRACING



EXTERIOR OF EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

REFERENCE DRAWINGS BRACING

ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL DRAWOUT MECHANISM AND INTERLOCKS

PROPER PHASE CONNECTION AND COLOR CODE

BUS AND SUPPORT INSULATORS HAZARDOUS LOCATION

PROPER LUBRICATION WORKING CLEARANCE

CLEAN SWITCHGEAR ANCHORAGE

CHECK MANUAL OPERATION OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND RELAYS

ALL FILTERS AND VENTS CLEAR

TEST RELAYS (ACCORDING TO ELEC. STUDY RECOMMENDATIONS)

CHECK PROPER EQUIPMENT GROUNDING TO GROUNDING BUS

CHECK INSTRUMENT AND RELAY COVERS SWITCHES FOR FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT

CHECK CIRCUIT BREAKER INSULATING PARTS

CHECK INCOMING LINE CONNECTIONS TO MAIN BUS

CHECK CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTACT SURFACES

VERIFY PROPER SIZE BREAKERS/FUSES

18. VERIFY LIFT OR BUILT WINCH FOR HANDLING HEAVY PARTS 19. VERIFY CORRECT OPERATION OF INDICATING LIGHTS, METERS,

GAUGES, ETC.

20. VERIFY BOLTED BUS CONNECTIONS TO MANUFACTURER

RECOMMENDATIONS

21. VERIFY SPACE HEATER IS PROVIDED AND OPERATIONAL



@ V


23.

MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENTS

VOLTAGE** CURRENT**

A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A A B C N G



24. NOTES

1. VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE AFTER UTILITY SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO INCOMING BREAKER WITH THE UTILITY BREAKER OPEN. 2. INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS MUST BE PERFORMED PRIOR TO ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT.

*CONDITION: A=ACCEPTABLE; R=NEEDS REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT; C=CORRECTED; NA=NOT APPLICABLE **NOTE VALUE AND PHASING

TRANSFORMER INSPECTION CHECKLIST




7. TEST EQUIPMENT TYPE/BRAND AND CALIBRATION DATE 8. TESTED BY



13. WET BULB TEMPERATURE 14. DRY BULB TEMPERATURE 15. ENCLOSURE TYPE 16. FREQUENCY



EXTERIOR OF EQUIPMENT PROPER PHASE CONNECTION AND COLOR

CODE

COMPLETENESS OF ASSEMBLY HAZARDOUS LOCATION

PROPER GROUNDING WORKING CLEARANCE

CONDITION OF INSULATION ANCHORAGE

TIGHTNESS OF BOLTED CONNECTIONS REFERENCE DRAWINGS

SEALS AND OIL LEVELS TURNS RATIO MEASUREMENTS

WINDING CONFIGURATION AUXILIARY DEVICE OPERATION



@ V


POLARIZATION INDEX

TURNS RATIO TEST

POWER FACTOR

PROPER VOLTAGE

19. NOTES:

1. PERFORM GROUND RESISTANCE TESTS PRIOR TO ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT.

*CONDITION: A=ACCEPTABLE; R=NEEDS REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT; C=CORRECTED; NA=NOT APPLICABLE

OCTOBER 2019 Project # 18.08502 332700 – Page 1

SECTION 332700 SANITARY SEWER PIPE AND APPURTENANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Where specific standards are referenced within this document, the most current specification and/or latest revision shall apply.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Valves and appurtenances.

3. Transition couplings.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, incidentals, and temporary facilities necessary to install and complete the sanitary sewer and/or force main installation in accordance with the plans. All pipe and appurtenance material shall be of the type and class specified herein.

B. All pipeline and appurtenance excavation, bedding, pipe laying, jointing and coupling of pipe joints and backfilling shall be completed as described herein.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

B. ACPA – American Concrete Pavement Association

C. ANSI – American National Standards Institute

D. API – American Petroleum Institute

E. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials

F. AWWA – American Water Works Association

G. CFM – Cubic Feet per Minute


H. DIP – Ductile Iron Pipe

I. HDD – Horizontal Directional Drilling

J. HDPE – High Density Polyethylene

K. LB – Pound

L. Min. - Minute

M. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

N. NSF – National Sanitation Foundation

O. NSPT – National Standard Pipe Thread

P. PE – Polyethylene

Q. PPM – Parts Per Million

R. PSI – Pounds per Square Inch

S. PSIG – Pounds per Square Inch (Gauge)

T. PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride

U. RCP – Reinforced Concrete Pipe

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 of these specifications.

B. Shop drawings or submittals shall be required for the following:

1. All sizes and types of pipe.

2. All pipe fittings, valves and appurtenances.

3. All transition couplings.

C. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties valves and appurtenances to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. When utilized on the project, the Contractor shall submit detailed plans and a description outlining all provisions and precautions to be taken by the Contractor regarding the handling of wastewater flows during the connections, replacement or startup of the pumps. This plan must be specific and complete, including such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, materials and all other incidental items necessary and/or required to ensure proper protection


of the facilities, including protection of the access and bypass pumping locations from damage due to the discharge flows, and compliance with the requirements and permit conditions. No construction shall begin until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed by the Owner. The Contractor shall allow 30 days for review of this plan.

1. The plan shall include but not limited to details of the following:

a. Staging areas for pumps; b. Plan showing proposed equipment and piping layouts including details

of tie-ins; c. List of pump sizes, valves, piping, fittings and other appurtenances; d. Method for controlling and monitoring the pumps. e. Contingency plan for an overflow caused by the diversion of the flow.


A. The Contractor shall coordinate material deliveries with the manufacturer/supplier. All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations using methods that will prevent damage to the materials.

B. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

C. The Contractor shall unload pipe and appurtenances so as to avoid deformation or other injury thereto. Pipe shall not be placed within pipe of a larger size and shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. If any defective material is discovered after installation, it shall be removed and replaced with sound pipe or shall be repaired by the Contractor in an approved manner and at his own expense.

D. The Contractor shall store all pipe and appurtenances on sills above storm drainage level and deliver for laying after the trench is excavated. Do not store any plastic materials in direct sunlight. All plastic materials shall be supported to prevent sagging and bending. All plastic materials shall also be covered with tarps if exposed to the elements for extended periods of time.

E. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.


F. Handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

G. When any material is damaged during transporting, unloading, handling or storing, the undamaged portions may be used as needed, or, if damaged sufficiently, the Engineer will reject the material as being unfit for installation. The Engineer will reject any ductile iron pipe with a damaged cement lining.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: The interruption of sewer flows within the collection system or service to any occupied structure or facility will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the utility owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining sewer flows at all times.

1. When by-pass pumping of sewer flows is necessary, the Contractor shall submit a by-pass pumping work plan to the Engineer and utility owner in conjunction with the submittal of a construction schedule. The plan shall include a primary pump and an identical standby pump.

2. Notify Engineer and utility owner no fewer than 72 hours in advance of proposed by-pass pumping of sewer flows.

3. Do not proceed with by-pass pumping of sewer flows without utility owner’s written permission.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with all requirements of utility owner providing sanitary sewer service including the connection of new collection system piping.

2. Comply with all standards of authorities having jurisdiction for sanitary sewer service piping, including materials, installation, and testing.

B. All piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: All associated materials shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. The design, installation and operation of any temporary pumping system, when required to maintain sewer flows in the existing system, shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall demonstrate experience in the design and operation of temporary bypass pumping systems or employ the services of a


vendor who can demonstrate this experience. The Contractor or vendor shall provide at least five (5) references of projects of a similar size and complexity as this project performed within the past three (3) years. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate any connections to the existing sanitary sewer with the utility owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BYPASS PUMPING EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment:

1. Existing pumps shall be utilized for bypass pumping operations.

2. Temporary discharge piping shall be constructed of rigid pipe with positive, restrained joints. Aluminum “irrigation” type piping or glued PVC pipe will not be allowed. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short sections and as accepted by the Owner.

3. Allowable piping shall be as specified herein or as otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.

B. System Description:

1. Design Requirements:

a. The Contractor shall verify that all necessary components of the existing system are in good working condition. The Owner shall be responsible for operating these valves during construction/upgrades at existing facilities. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s personnel regarding the operation of these facilities and providing a minimum of two (2) weeks’ notice to the Owner prior to conducting any verification or performing any construction operations.

2.2 PIPE MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be first quality with smooth interior and exterior surfaces, free from cracks, blisters, honeycombs and other imperfections, and true to theoretical shapes and forms throughout. All materials shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at the plant, trench, or other point of delivery, for the purpose of culling and rejecting materials which do not conform to the requirements of these


specifications. Such material shall be marked by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove it from the project site upon notice being received of its rejection.

B. As particular specifications are cited, the designation shall be construed to refer to the latest revision under the same specification number, or to superseding specifications under a new number except provisions in revised specifications which are clearly inapplicable.

2.3 DUCTILE IRON SEWER PIPE (DIP) – GRAVITY SEWER AND FORCE MAINS

A. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be as manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151, ASTM A-746, ANSI Specification A21.50 and A21.51 and shall be Class 350 unless otherwise specified on the drawings or in the Bid Schedule.

1. The pipe interior shall be cement mortar lined and seal coated, standard thickness, in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.4.

2. The exterior of all pipe shall be coated with either a coal or asphaltic base bituminous pipe coating in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.8.

3. Pipe shall be furnished with Slip Joints, Mechanical Joints, or Flanged Joints as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the specifications described below:

B. Slip Joints: Slip or “push-on” joints shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C111. Pipe thickness shall be Class 350 as determined by AWWA C150.

1. Bells of “slip” joint pipe shall be contoured to receive a bulbshaped circular rubber gasket, and plain ends shall have a slight taper to facilitate installation. The gasket and associated lubricant shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer and shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.11.

2. The jointing shall be done by guiding the plain end into the bell until contact is made with the gasket and by exerting a sufficient compressive force to drive the joint home until plain end makes full contact with the base of the bell. In force main installations, no joint may exceed a maximum deflection of 11 inches in an 18-foot joint of pipe (3 degrees).

C. Restrained-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. All restrained joint pipe shall be ductile iron, manufactured in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. The rated working pressure for pipe sizes 4-inch through 24-inch shall be 350 PSI and 250 PSI for pipe sizes 30-inch through 64-inch as determined by AWWA C150 unless otherwise noted. Push-on joints for such pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.


2. Restrained joints shall be restrained push-on joints, TR Flex by U.S. Pipe and Foundry; Lok-Fast by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, or equal. Joints shall be suitable for 250 psi working pressure and be fabricated of heavy section ductile iron casting. Bolts and nuts shall be low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A307, Grade B.

3. External loading conditions shall not deflect the pipe more than 3% in the horizontal direction.

D. Mechanical-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. All mechanical joint pipe shall be ductile iron manufactured in accordance with AWWA C111. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151, and the pipe thickness shall be Class 350 as determined by AWWA C150 unless otherwise noted.

2. All bolts shall be tightened by means of torque wrenches in such a manner that the follower shall be brought up toward the pipe evenly. If effective sealing is not obtained by tightening the bolts to the specified torques, the joint shall be disassembled and reassembled after thorough cleaning.

3. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high grade steel, low alloy type, with tee or hex head and American Standard threads. Mechanical joint gland shall be gray iron and shall utilize a plain rubber gasket.

E. Flanged-Joint Ductile Iron Pipe:

1. Flanged pipe shall have flanges with long hubs, shop fitted on the threaded end of the pipe.

2. Where required, flanges shall be tapped for stud bolts. Flanges shall be accurately faced at right angles to the pipe axis and shall be drilled smooth and true, and covered with coal tar pipe varnish or otherwise protected against corrosion of flange faces. Flange faces shall be cleaned to bare metal with wire brushed before installation of pipe.

3. Ductile iron flanged joint pipe shall have a thickness of Class 53 minimum and shall conform to AWWA C110 and AWWA C115. Pipe shall be ordered in lengths needed as no pipe shall be cut, threaded or flanged in the field. All pipe shall have Class 125 flanges conforming to AWWA C110 unless otherwise specified.

4. Flanged joints shall be made up with through bolts of the required size. Bolts shall be zinc plated, with good and sound, well fitting threads, so that the nuts may be turned freely by hand.


5. Flanged joints shall be made up using only full face gaskets with a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch. Ring gaskets are not acceptable. Gasket material shall be rubber or approved equal as recommended by the Manufacturer.

6. Connecting flanges shall be in proper alignment and no external force shall be used to bring them together.

F. Long Span Pipe: “Long span” type ductile iron pipe shall be used for unsupported spans greater than 20’-0”. “Long span” ductile iron pipe and associated pipe joints shall be designed by the pipe manufacturer specifically for elevated crossings with unsupported spans shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings from the pipe manufacturer for the long span pipe. Shop drawings shall include material specifications for the pipe and joints, and shall specify locations of joints with respect to the pier locations shown on the drawings. Long span ductile iron pipe shall be as manufactured by American, U.S. Pipe, or equal.

2.4 FITTINGS – DIP AND PVC FORCE MAINS

A. Fittings in DIP and PVC force mains shall be required where the sanitary sewer force main has a significant change in alignment or grade. The specifications for the force main fittings are described below:

1. All fittings for any type of sewer force main shall be ductile iron mechanical joint fittings manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification A-21.1 and AWWA Standard C153 (compact body type) for underground piping for 3 inch through 24 inch diameter fittings and AWWA C110 (full body type) for pipe diameters larger than 24 inches. Where flanged pipe is used ductile iron fittings shall be flanged in accordance with AWWA C153 or AWWA C110 (based on sizing as stated above) for exposed piping. All flanges shall be Class 125 unless otherwise noted.

2. The interior of all fittings shall be cement mortar lined (not less then 1/16-inch), seal coated in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.4 and AWWA C-104, and suitable for a minimum working pressure of 250 PSI unless otherwise specified.

2.5 GASKETS

A. All rubber gaskets for DIP and PVC pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C111. All gaskets shall be a product of the pipe manufacturer, made specifically for the pipe being installed, and shall match the shape and configuration of the joint.

B. Gaskets for ductile iron restrained joint shall be push-on pipe shall provide a trouble-free means of joint restraint for the pipe. These restraining systems shall


include gaskets provided by the pipe manufacturer that contain high-strength stainless steel elements spaced around the gasket that develop a dependable gripping action. These push-on restrained joint gaskets shall be rated for a working pressure of 350 PSI for pipe sizes 4-inch through 24-inch and 150 psi for 30-inch pipe.

2.6 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Swing check valves smaller than 3 inches in diameter shall be single disc with renewable bronze seat rings, bronze discs or disc rings and bronze disc hinges and pins and shall be designed to give a full diameter passage.

B. Swing check valves 3 inches in diameter and larger shall be constructed with heavy cast-iron or cast-steel body with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring and a non-corrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever. The valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the outlet pressure. The valve disc shall be of cast-iron or cast-steel and shall be suspended from a non-corrosive shaft.

2.7 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug valves shall be solid one piece, cast of ASTM A536 ductile iron. The plug shall have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the shaft. Plug shall not contact the seat prior to 90 percent closed. Plug facing shall be Chloroprene (CR), or other resilient facing suitable for the application.

B. Bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Port shall be rectangular. Port area shall be 100 percent of Standard class pipe area. Bearings shall be sleeve type and made of sintered, oil-impregnated permanently lubricated type 316 stainless steel per ASTM A743 Grade CF8M.

C. Seats shall be 1/8-inch thick welded overlay of not less than 95 percent pure nickel. Seat shall be at least ½-inch wide and raised. The raised surface shall be completely covered with nickel to insure that the resilient plug face contacts only the nickel seat.

D. Adjustable Packing shall be of the multiple V-ring type, with a packing gland follower. Shaft seals shall permit inspection, adjustment or complete replacement of packing without disturbing any part of the valve or actuator assembly except the packing gland follower.

E. Grit Excluders made of PTFE shall be provided to prevent the entry of grit and solids into the bearing areas.

F. Pressure ratings shall be bi-directional and 175 psi on sizes 3-inch through 12-inch diameters and 150 psi for 14-inch through 36-inch diameters. Every valve


shall be given a certified hydrostatic and seat test, with test reports being available upon request.

G. Worm gear actuators shall be provided on all valves six inches and larger. Actuators shall be enclosed in a cast iron housing, with outboard seals to protect the bearings and other internal components. The actuator shaft and gear quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings.

H. Buried actuators shall be 90 percent grease filled. Input shaft and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Actuator mounting brackets shall be totally enclosed.

I. Eccentric plug valves and actuators shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of AWWA C517 and other applicable standards. Flanged ends shall be per ANSI B16.1 and mechanical joint ends per AWWA C111.

2.8 SEWAGE AIR/VACUUM RELEASE VALVES

A. Acceptable Products:

1. The air/vacuum release valve shall be designed specifically for use on sanitary sewer pressure (force) mains. It shall exhaust large volumes of air that may be present in a system during filling of the main or on pump start-up. It shall also allow air to re-enter when the system is drained intentionally or due to a break in the main (prevents vacuum from forming).

2. Three inch and smaller combination air valves with operating pressures of 150 psi or less shall be of the integral type with a valve assembly which functions as both an air and vacuum valve and an air release valve. The valves shall be GA Industries "Figure 942", Crispin “Type SA", Val-Matic "Models 801A/802A/803A" or ARI “D-020”.

3. Four inch and larger combination air valves shall consist of an air and vacuum valve with an externally mounted air release valve. The valves shall be GA Industries "Figure 950 Kinetic Custom Combination Air Valves", Crispin “Type SL", or Val-Matic "Model No. 48A/49A".

B. Materials:

1. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials of construction shall comply with the standards of the authorities having jurisdiction. The use of stressed thermoplastic components will not be acceptable.

a. Valve Trim: Austenitic stainless steel. b. Float: Austenitic stainless steel. c. Seats: Buna-N


C. Shop Coating and Painting:

1. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces, except stainless steel components, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable. Field painting is covered in the protective coatings section.

D. Shutoff Valves:

1. A shutoff valve shall be provided in the piping leading to each air release valve and combination air valve. Each 4-inch and larger combination air valve shall be provided with a shutoff valve between the air and vacuum valve and the air release valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BYPASS PUMPING

A. Under this item the Contractor is required to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, etc. to implement a temporary pumping system for the purpose of diverting the existing flow around the work area for the duration of the project.

B. Field Quality Control and Maintenance:

1. Testing:

a. The Contractor shall perform leakage and pressure tests on the new bypass pumping discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation. The Owner and Engineer shall be given 24-hours’ notice prior to testing.

b. The bypass pumping system shall be tested and operated successfully for 24 continuous hours prior to start of work.

2. Inspection:

a. The Contractor shall monitor the bypass pumping operation at all times to ensure that the system is working correctly.

3. Maintenance Service:

a. The Contractor shall insure that the temporary pumping system is properly maintained and a responsible operator shall be on-site when pumps are operating.


b. A factory-trained service technician shall be located within at least 120 miles from the project site with a full complement of in-stock spare parts for pumps and piping.

4. Extra Materials:

a. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site as required. b. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be

maintained on the site.

C. Preparation:

1. Precautions:

a. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for bypass pumping during the time when the main is shut down for any reason. System must overcome any existing force main pressure on discharge.

b. Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the area the Contractor selects to locate the bypass pipelines. The Contractor shall locate the bypass pipelines to minimize any disturbance to existing utilities and shall obtain approval of the pipeline locations from the Owner. All costs associated with relocating utilities and obtaining all approvals shall be paid by the Contractor.

c. During all bypass pumping operation, the Contractor shall protect the Owner’s pump station, processes, and/or sewer mains and all local sewer lines from damage inflicted by any equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all physical damage to the pumping station and main and all sewer lines caused by human or mechanical failure.

D. Performance Requirements:

1. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.

2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary means to safely convey the flow past the work area. The Contractor will not be permitted to stop or impede the flows in existing force mains.

3. The Contractor shall maintain flow around the work area in a manner that will not cause surcharging, damage to sewers and that will protect property from damage and flooding. Any overflow that occurs due to a failure in the bypass system will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any penalties issued by authorities having jurisdiction will be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor.

4. The Contractor shall protect water resources, wetlands and other natural resources. No sewage or water from the bypass pumping operation shall


be spilled on the ground or allowed to drain to storm drains. When disassembling bypass pumping pipe, the Contractor shall ensure that any sewage remaining in the pipe is drained back to the sewer collection system. All spills shall be reported to the Owner, contained and cleaned up immediately by the Contractor.

E. Installation and Removal:

1. The Contractor shall make connections to the existing piping and construct temporary bypass pumping structures only at the access location indicated on the Drawings and as may be required to provide adequate suction conduit.

2. The Contractor shall comply with OSHA requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases, combustible oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and confined spaces.

3. Upon completion of the bypass pumping operations, and after the receipt of written permission from the Owner, the Contractor shall remove all the piping, restore all property to pre-construction condition and restore all pavement. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any approvals for placement of the temporary pipeline within public ways from authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 PIPING AND VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications:

1. Do not use flanged pipe, fittings or valves or unions for underground (buried) piping. Fittings and valves for underground (buried) piping shall be mechanical joint.

2. Flanged pipe, fittings and valves and unions shall be used on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

3. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used as specified, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Existing Utilities and Separation Requirements:

1. The Contractor shall be required to excavate to determine the precise location of utilities or other underground obstructions which are shown on


the Plans and/or marked by the utility owners. Such location and excavation shall be at least 500 feet ahead of construction, unless otherwise noted. This work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. All utility owners shall be notified prior to excavation as required by law. Utility owners who are members of VA 811 may be notified by calling 811 (toll free) before any excavation or drilling. The Contractor will be fully responsible for damage to any utilities if the owners have not been properly notified as required by the law. All damage to such structures and pipelines and all damage to property or persons resulting from damage to such structures and pipelines shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be completely repaired within a reasonable time. No claim shall be made against the Owner for damage or delay of the work on account of the proximity of, or the leakage from, such structures and pipelines. Where high pressure gas lines are to be crossed, they shall be uncovered by hand excavation methods before other excavation near them is started.

3. Utility owners may, at their option, have representatives present to supervise excavation in the vicinity of their utilities. The cost of such supervision, if any, shall be borne by the Contractor.

4. Conflicts with underground utilities may necessitate changes in alignment and/or grade of this construction. All such changes will be approved by the Engineer before construction proceeds.

5. When underground obstructions not shown on the Plans are encountered, the Contractor shall promptly report the conflict to the Engineer and shall not proceed with construction until the conflict is resolved.

6. When a sewer main or lateral crosses an existing water main or other utility, the Contractor shall make the installation in accordance with the minimum specifications of the Controlling Agency and in accordance with the following minimum requirements. When a sewer main or lateral crosses or parallels an existing utility, the following clearance requirements are to be met or ferrous sewer pipe with watertight joints shall be used for a distance of 10 feet outside said point of crossing or until horizontal separation requirements are achieved.

a. Min. Vertical Separation for Sewer Crossings: 1) Storm Sewers - 24" Vertical 2) Under Water - 18" Vertical 3) Over Water - 18" Vertical * Sewer over water requires that

both pipes shall be ferrous pipe with a 20 foot jointless span centered at crossing. *

4) Cable - 24" Vertical 5) Power - 24" Vertical 6) Gas - 24" Vertical


b. Horizontal Separations: 1) Storm Sewers - 5' 2) Water Mains - 10' 3) Water Supply - 100' (WS-I Waters, Class I or Class II

impounded reservoirs) 4) Water Supply - 50' (WS-II, WS-III, B, SA, ORW, HQW or SB

Waters – from Normal High Water) 5) Designated Trout Streams - 25' 6) Other Stream, Lake or Impoundment - 10' 7) Building Foundation - 5' 8) Basement - 10' 9) Ground Water Lowering and Surface Drainage Ditch 10’ 10) Swimming Pool - 10' 11) Private Wells - 25' 12) Public Wells - 50'

B. Exposed Piping:

1. All exposed piping shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and field painted as described below. All exposed pipe shall be ductile iron utilizing flanged joints unless otherwise noted.

2. All exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings and valves shall be field painted with two (2) coats of epoxy paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Color of paint shall be as selected by the Owner.


A. The Contractor shall maintain the project, insofar as his construction work is concerned, in first class condition for such time as is necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all installations are correct and acceptable.

B. Line Cleaning: Prior to inspection of any section(s) of gravity sanitary sewer pipe or force main the Contractor shall completely clean the lines of all debris, silt, etc. The pipe line shall be ready for use by the Owner and shall be proved to be in first class condition and constructed properly in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

C. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer that all or portions of the work are ready for testing. All testing shall be scheduled with the Engineer, who will coordinate with the Owner, and respond to the Contractor regarding a mutually available date and time for the necessary testing. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. All labor, equipment, water and other materials, including meters and gauges, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense.


D. Inspection and Testing of Sewer Force Mains:

1. When the sanitary sewer force main is completed, the Engineer shall inspect the line for conformance with the provisions of the drawings and specifications, particularly with respect to alignment and depth. The minimum depth of all force mains shall be 36 inches unless otherwise specified.

2. All newly constructed sanitary sewer force main and valved sections shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure-leakage test. Hydrostatic testing shall be conducted only after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have fully hardened. Force mains shall be tested in sections not to exceed 4,000 lineal feet per test section. The Contractor shall install sufficient additional valves if not shown on the drawings to allow for testing.

3. HDPE pipe shall be hydrostatically tested after joining into continuous lengths prior to installation and again after installation. Pressure and temperature shall be monitored with certified instruments during the test. After this test, the water will be removed with pigs. Erosion prevention procedures shall be used during removal and discharge of the water. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with these specifications.

4. Each completed section of the pipeline shall be plugged at both ends and slowly filled with water. As the main is being filled with water in preparation of the test, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. The main shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure or 100 pounds per square inch, whichever is greater, for a period of two hours unless otherwise specified. Pressure shall be applied to the main by means of a hand pump for small lines or by use of a gasoline pump or fire engine for larger lines.

5. The rate of leakage shall be determined at 15 minute intervals by means of volumetric measure of the water added during the test until the rate has stabilized at the constant value for three consecutive 15 minute periods.

6. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled. No piping installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than ten (10) gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours.

7. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this test shall be removed and replaced with sound materials, and the test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory. Precautions shall be taken to remove or otherwise protect equipment in, or attached to, pipe to prevent damage or injury thereto.


8. Tests of insulated and concealed piping shall be made before the piping is covered or concealed. No leakage will be allowed under the above tests for piping in buildings, structures or on bridges.

9. Ductile iron force main piping shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C600, while all PVC force main piping shall be tested in accordance with AWWA M23. HDPE force main piping shall be tested in accordance with ASTM F2164.

E. Final Acceptance:

1. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, as to the satisfactory completion of the work in any or all sections of gravity sanitary sewer pipe, force main, included in the project.

2. Upon such notification, the Contractor shall immediately remove all construction equipment, excess materials, tools, debris, etc. from the site(s) and leave the same in a neat, orderly condition acceptable to the Engineer.

3. Final landscaping requirements and restoration of surfaces shall then be completed by the Contractor in accordance with their respective specification sections and as shown on the drawings.


JUNE 2019 Project # 18.08502 332735 – Page 1

SECTION 332735 EXPOSED PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing and installing all materials and performing all labor required to install exposed piping and appurtenances as required to complete the project.


1. Division 09 Section “Painting” 2. Division 33 Section “Air Piping” 3. Division 33 Section “Water Pipe and Appurtenances”. 4. Division 33 Section “Sanitary Sewer Pipe and Appurtenances”.


A. The work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, incidentals and services required for the complete installation of exposed piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances for buildings, vaults and other structures as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. All work in connection with installation of exposed piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall comply with all current requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor is responsible for being familiar with and adhering to these requirements.

C. The Contractor shall inspect the locations of the proposed work associated with this section and shall familiarize themselves with the conditions under which the work will be performed, and with all necessary details and the suitability of their equipment and methods for the work required. The omission of any installation details which may not appear within the Contract Documents shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for completing the work as necessary.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to Engineer to include at least the following:

1. Descriptive literature, product data, and catalog cut sheets.

2. Single line piping layout for the project.

3. Manufacturer’s certification of factory tests.

4. If field welding is necessary, AWS issued welding certificates shall be provided.


A. All materials shall be first quality with smooth interior and exterior surfaces, free from cracks, blisters, honeycombs, and other imperfections, and true to theoretical shapes and forms throughout.

B. All materials shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at the plant, or other point of delivery for the purpose of culling and rejecting material that does not conform to the requirements of these Specifications. Such materials shall be marked by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove it from the project site upon notice being received of its rejection.

C. All ductile iron, black steel, or galvanized steel piping shall be provided by a single manufacturer. All Type 304 or 316 stainless steel piping shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Piping manufacturers shall have at least five (5) years of experience in manufacturing the applicable supplied pipe.


A. Contractor shall coordinate material deliveries with the manufacturer/supplier. All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations using methods that will prevent damage to the materials.

B. The Contractor shall unload pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances so as to avoid deformation or other injury thereto. Pipe shall not be placed within pipe of a larger size and shall not be rolled or dragged over gravel or rock during handling. If any defective material is discovered, it shall be removed and replaced with sound pipe or shall be repaired by the Contractor in an approved manner and at their expense.

C. The Contractor shall store all pipe and appurtenances on sills above storm drainage level and delivered for installation. Do not store any plastic or rubber materials in direct sunlight.

D. Protect pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances from dirt and damage.


E. When any material is damaged during transporting, unloading, handling or storing, the undamaged portions may be used as needed, or, if damaged sufficiently, the Engineer will reject the material as being unfit for installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. All materials shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and materials for one (1) year following final acceptance by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise shown, all exposed piping, fittings and valves shall be ductile/cast iron as specified elsewhere within these specifications.

B. Stainless Steel Pipe:

1. Stainless steel pipe shall be Grade TP 304, Schedule 40S, 10S, or 5S, or as indicated. Pipe shall be annealed, pickled, and passivated to comply with ASTM A312. Fittings shall be suitable for the pipe and comply with ASTM A403. Welding shall be in accordance with all applicable ANSI standard.

2. Field welds shall be fusion-welded in accordance with ANSI/AWS B31.1. All welding is to be performed by welders certified by the AWS in accordance with the requirements set forth in the AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.

3. Ends shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated on the plans.

4. Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150.

5. Threaded ends shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Threaded fittings shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/ASME B16.3, Class 150.

C. Welded Steel Pipe:

1. Welded Steel Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C-200 (NSF 61). Welded Steel Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C-207 Fittings Flanged ends shall be faced and drilled per ANSI B16.1 Class 125.


2. The interior of all Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings shall be lined with an epoxy coating in accordance to AWWA C-210. The exterior of all Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings shall have an epoxy protective coating adhering to AWWA C-210.

3. Flange isolation kits shall be utilized between welded steel fittings and ductile iron fittings and shall be manufactured per NSF/ANSI 61. Isolation kits shall be manufactured by GPT Industries, APS, or approved equal.

2.2 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND VALVES

A. Valves on exposed piping shall be operated by handwheel and shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening.

B. Gate valves located inside structures shall be of the rising stem type unless otherwise specified.

C. Knifegate valves located inside structures shall be of the rising stem type. Valve shall be resilient seated, uni-directional body style, 304 stainless steel body and gate material, and EPDM seat material. Valve shall have a manual handwheel actuator with an extended yoke providing a handwheel location that is approximately 60” above the centerline of the pipe.

D. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

E. All copper tubing shall be Type "K" flexible copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B 88.

F. All fittings for copper tubing shall be pressure-seal (compression-type) fittings.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. In general, hangers and supports shall be provided as necessary to rigidly support the piping, fittings and valves. Unless explicitly stated on the drawings, in no case shall pipe hangers and supports be spaced greater than ten feet (10’-0”) apart. Pipe hangers and supports shall be placed at or near all changes in direction of the conduit or unit being supported. Refer to drawings that show piping to have closer hanger and/or support spacing.

B. All supports, hangers, and accessories shall be the manufacturer of either Fee and Mason, Grinnell, Carpenter and Patterson, Unistrut, or other approved manufacturer of comparable experience.

C. All hangers and supporting devices shall be shipped with standard factory finish, unless otherwise specified.


2.4 WALL AND FLOOR CASTINGS AND SLEEVES

A. Wall and floor castings shall be provided for ductile iron pipes which pass through the walls or floors of structures below grade or below the water line of water retaining structures.

B. Wall and floor castings shall be ductile or cast iron and shall be provided with integral waterstops. End connections shall be flanged or plain end as indicated on the plans.

C. Copper tubing passing through walls and floors of structures shall be installed in sleeves. A separate sleeve shall be provided for each tube. Where sleeves pass through exterior walls or floors of structures, or where water tightness is required, the space between the tube and the sleeve shall be caulked on both sides with an approved caulking material.

D. Unless otherwise shown, sleeves shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 Steel Pipe.

E. Sleeves to be caulked shall have welded waterstops on the outside and caulking rings on the inside. Sleeves installed in walls have been flush with wall surfaces. Floor sleeves shall have floor and ceiling plates where finished appearance is required. Where no floor plates are required, sleeves shall extend 6” above the finished floor.

2.5 GAUGES

A. All pressure gauges shall be stainless steel, glycerin-filled gauges with a minimum dial size of 3 inches meeting the requirements of ASME B40.1, Grade 1A.

B. Pressure gauges shall be selected which most completely utilize the full range of the gauge while accommodating the maximum anticipated pressures within the piping system.

C. Gauges shall read pressure in “pounds per square foot” and incorporate a flexible diaphragm seal between the pressurized liquid being conveyed and the pressure gauge. The diaphragm seal shall be either the inline-saddle type design with a minimum diaphragm surface of 5 square inches or the complete flow-thru type design with flange connection. Inline saddle diaphragms and housing parts exposed to the pressurized liquid being conveyed shall be type 316 stainless steel. The flexible cylinder protecting the sensing liquid on the flow-thru design shall be Buna N and the flanges shall be type 316 stainless steel. The inside diameter of the flow-thru assembly shall be the same as the adjacent discharge piping. Gauges shall be mounted on a tap equipped with a valve to allow complete isolation and removal of the gauge without system shut down.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. All piping is to be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and the contract specifications.

B. Installation manuals from various material suppliers shall be furnished to the Engineer for his review and approval prior to installation of any material if so requested. The Engineer may augment any manufacturer's installation recommendations.

C. Proper tools, implements, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used for the safe and convenient prosecution of pipe installation.

D. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other materials used in the installation of pipe shall be placed by means of suitable equipment in such a manner to prevent damage to the pipe materials, to the protective coating on the pipe materials, and to provide a safe working condition to all personnel.

E. Each piece of pipe, fitting, and valve being installed shall be carefully given a final inspection to see that it is clean, sound and free of defects. Pipe shall be removed at any time if broken, injured or displaced in the process of installation.

F. Neatly install exposed piping in plumb, vertical and horizontal alignments as shown on the Drawings arranged such that they are parallel and at right angles to walls and other piping and equipment and shall be graded such that the system can be drained.

G. Alignment of piping smaller than 4-inches may not be shown. However, install according to the Drawing's intent and with clearance and allowance for expansion and contraction, operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment, headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles, and system drainage and air removal.

H. Changes in direction of pipes shall be made by using straight pipe and fittings.

I. When cutting short lengths of pipe, a pipe cutter, as approved by the Engineer, will be used and care will be taken to make the cut at right angles to the center line of the pipe or on the exact skew as shown on the plans.

J. The Contractor shall utilize restrained joints, threaded rods, or concrete thrust blocks as required to adequately restrain all piping, fittings, and valves.

K. Isolation valves shall be restrained so that adjacent fittings or valves can be removed with the isolation valve closed (i.e., gate valve or plug valve adjacent to a check valve).


L. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement.

M. Provide easily accessible drain points for all utility piping to allow complete drainage of system.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. All pipe joints shall be constructed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s specifications and materials. Any deviation must have prior approval of the Engineer.

B. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so there is no restraint on the opposite end of pipe, fitting or valve which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to other pipe or equipment flanges.

C. Tighten all flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening torque in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area prior to installation of any bolt between piping flanges and/or equipment flanges.

E. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flanges are tightened.

F. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of connecting piping.

G. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting and alignment.

H. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble piping with gaskets in place and a minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with other piping, fittings, valves or equipment flanges. Realign as necessary, install all flange bolts and make all final connections.

I. Threaded joints shall be made tight with Teflon tape, a stiff mixture of graphite, and oil, or inert filler and oil applied to the male thread only. Virgin Teflon tape shall only be used.


3.3 UNIONS

A. All interior and exposed exterior piping systems shall be provided with an adequate number of screwed unions for pipe lines 2” in diameter and less.

B. Unions shall be provided where shown on the plans and at control valves, solenoid valves, and at other items of the connected equipment that may require disconnection of the piping for service or maintenance.

C. Line sectionalizing unions shall be provided to facilitate the dismantling of any branch line or of a section of the main line without disturbing the adjacent piping.

3.4 GAUGES

A. Assure gauge position is clear of equipment functions and movements and location is protected from maintenance and operation of equipment.

B. Assure gauge is readable from an accessible standing position.

3.5 EQUIPMENT DRAINAGE AND MAINTENANCE PIPING

A. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur.

B. Run drain piping to nearest floor drain.

C. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers, panelboards, etc. If piping must be so routed, utilize a 16-gauge, 316 stainless steel drop pans under piping and over full length of electrical equipment. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.

D. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves and provide drainage for process piping.

3.6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Anchor or support exposed piping, fittings and valves subjected to dynamic forces to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or structural components not designed to resist those stresses.

B. Unless otherwise directed, no pipe, conduit, or appurtenant device shall be supported from other piping, stairways, ladders, or walkways.

C. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and supported from a common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size to account for the total supported weight. The pipe in the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set the distance between trapeze hangers.


D. All non-rigid conduits requiring continuous support shall be laid in cable trays adequately ventilated and of adequate size.

3.7 COPPER TUBING

A. Copper tubing shall be erected to proper lines and grades, and shall be connected with soldered joints and fittings, or with compression fittings, as specified or as shown. Joints in copper tubing to be installed in concrete will not be permitted. Tubing to be installed shall have the minimum practicable number of joints.

3.8 PAINTING

A. All exposed piping shall be painted in accordance with Section 099000 of these specifications.


A. After the pipe and appurtenances has been satisfactorily installed complete, the newly installed pipe and valve sections shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure leakage test.

B. Exposed waterlines shall be tested in conjunction with other water system testing in accordance with Section 332660 of these specifications.

C. Exposed sewer force mains shall be tested in conjunction with other sewer force main testing in accordance with Section 332700 of these specifications.

D. No leakage will be allowed under the above tests for piping in buildings and structures. Cracked or defective pipe, joints, fittings, or valves discovered in consequence of this test shall be removed and replaced with sound materials, and the test shall be repeated until the test results are satisfactory.

E. Precautions shall be taken to remove or otherwise protect equipment in, or attached to, pipe lines to prevent damage or injury thereto.

F. Tests of insulated and concealed piping shall be made before the piping is covered or concealed.

G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing with all testing done in the presence of the Engineer. All labor, equipment, water and materials, including gauges, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing and maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.

B. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properly dress and make joint.

C. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system.

D. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to any equipment, the building, its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner.

3.11 STERILIZATION

A. After successfully completion of testing, all exposed water lines shall be sterilized in conjunction with other water system sterilization in accordance with Section 332660 of these specifications.



SECTION 409100 PRIMARY PROCESS MEASUREMENT DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: General requirements for instrumentation devices and the Input/Outputs required and not specified as an integral part of discrete process. This section includes:

1. Magnetic flow meters.

2. Ultrasonic surface level / flow meters.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

A. ASME/ANSI B16.1 (1989) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

B. ASME PTC 19.5 (1972) Application Part II of Fluid Meters

2. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

C. ASTM A 126 (1993) Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

D. ASTM B 61 (1993) Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

3. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

E. AWWA C700 (1990; Addendum 1991) Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case


F. AWWA C704 (1992) Propeller-Type Meters for Waterworks Applications

4. MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS (MIL)

G. MIL-P-24441 (Rev. B; Supp. 1) Paint, Epoxy-Polyamide

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals required in the sections which refer to this section shall conform to the requirements of Section 001300, and to the following additional requirements. Submit the following in accordance with section entitled "Submittal Procedures”.

1. Perform calibration and submit test report.

B. The following information shall be included in the submittal for this section:

2. Data sheets and catalog literature for microprocessor-based transmitters and transducers.

3. Interconnection and dimensional drawings.

4. Installation and operations manuals.

5. List of spare parts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be standard commercial products in regular production by the manufacturer and suitable for the required service.

2.02 MAGNETIC FLOW METER SYSTEMS

B. Provide a magnetic flow meter in the locations as indicated on the equipment schedule or as shown on the drawings.

C. Magnetic flow meter systems shall include a magnetic flow tube and a microprocessor-based "smart" transmitter that is capable of converting and transmitting a signal from the flow tube. Magnetic flow meters shall utilize


the characterized field principle of electromagnetic induction and shall produce DC signals directly proportional to the liquid flow rate.

D. Each meter shall be furnished with a stainless steel or carbon steel metering tube and carbon steel flanges with a polyurethane, ceramic, neoprene, or Teflon liner as required by the application and/or as specified herein. Liner shall have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. The inside diameter of the liner shall be within 0.125 inches of the inside diameter of the adjoining pipe. Liner protectors shall be available on all flow tubes.

E. The flow tube shall be provided with flush mounted electrodes or bullet nose as indicated in the equipment schedule. Ultrasonic electrode cleaning shall not be needed or acceptable.

F. Grounding rings shall be provided for all meters.

G. All materials of construction for metallic wetted parts (electrodes, grounding rings, etc.) shall be minimum 316 stainless steel, but shall be compatible with the process fluid for each meter in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

H. Flow tube shall be rated for pressures up to 1.1 times the flange rating of adjacent piping. System shall be rated for ambient temperatures of -30 to +65C. Meter and transmitter housings shall meet NEMA 4X requirements as a minimum. When meter and transmitter are located in classified explosion hazard areas, the meter and transmitter housings shall be selected with rating to meet the requirements for use in those areas. Non-metallic transmitter housings shall not be acceptable.

I. The transmitter shall provide pulsed DC coil drive current to the flow tube and shall convert the returning signal to a linear, isolated 4-20 mA DC signal. The transmitter shall utilize "smart" electronics and shall contain automatic, continuous zero correction, signal processing routines for noise rejection, and an integral LCD readout capable of displaying flow rate and totalized flow. The transmitter shall continuously run self-diagnostic routines and report errors via English language messages.

J. The transmitter's preamplifier input impedance shall be a minimum of 109-1011 ohms which shall make the system suited for the amplification of low-level input signals and capable of operation with a material build up on the electrodes.

K. The transmitter shall provide an automatic low flow cutoff below a user configurable low flow condition (0-10%). The transmitter's outputs shall also be capable of being forced to zero by an external contact operation.

L. Each flow tube shall be factory calibrated and assigned a calibration constant or factor to be entered into the associated transmitter as part of


the meter configuration parameters. Manual calibration of the flow meter shall not be required. Meter configuration parameters shall be stored in non-volatile memory in the transmitter. An output hold feature shall be provided to maintain a constant output during configuration changes.

M. The transmitter shall be capable of communicating digitally with a remote configuration device via a frequency-shift-keyed, high frequency signal superimposed on the 4-20 mA output signal. The remote configuration device shall be capable of being placed anywhere in the 4-20 mA output loop. A password-based security lockout feature shall be provided to prevent unauthorized modification of configuration parameters.

N. Accuracy shall be 0.50% of rate over the flow velocity range of 0.3 to 10.0 m/s. Repeatability shall be 0.1% of rate; minimum turndown shall be 100:1. Minimum required liquid conductivity shall not be greater than 5 uS/cm. Maximum response time shall be adjustable between 1 and 100 seconds as a minimum. Transmitter ambient temperature operating limits shall be -10 to +50 degrees C. Power supply shall be 115 VAC, 60 Hz.

O. All flow tubes shall have continuous submergence protection up to 30 ft (IP68). This requires the user to install sealed IP68 approved cable glands, conduit connections, or conduit plugs and provide pre-wired potted and sealed junction box to prevent the ingress of water. All options use the sealed conduits to meet IP 68 protection requirements.

P. All mag flow meters are to have the option to turn on mag diagnostics such as meter verification, high process noise detection and grounding/wiring fault detection. Access of the diagnostics to be done through the local operator interface (LOI), handheld communicator or Asset Management Device Manager.

Q. Flow tubes shall be 150-lb flange mounted unless otherwise noted. The cables for interconnecting the meter and transmitter shall be furnished by the manufacturer. Transmitter shall be mounted integrally on flow tube, wall, or 2-inch pipe mounted as shown in the Drawings and/or as specified.

R. Equip unit with 50 FT of cable and 10 FT of 120 V plug in cord to permit location of unit up to 50 FT from magnetic meter.

S. Magnetic flow meter systems shall be as manufactured by Krohne, Model Optiflux 2000 magnetic flowmeter with the option of integral mount transmitter and/or remote mount transmitter.

2.03 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide all standard recommended spare parts as specified in the manufacturer's instruction manuals for each component in the system.


B. Provide new sensor probes at the end of the contractor warranty period.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturers sunshield on all indicating transmitters that are installed outdoors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish the services of an engineer representative of the manufacturer of the equipment for checking the installation, making the necessary adjustments and calibrations, placing the equipment in operation, and performing the acceptance tests. The representative also shall be available for not less than 2 days to instruct operating personnel in the use, operation, and maintenance of the equipment during the initial operating period. Install all equipment in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. For flow meters, follow manufacturer’s recommendation upstream and downstream straight pipe diameters and transducer orientation to achieve optimum performance.

1. Mount the remote transducers onto the pipe at the calculated separation distance.

2. Where required, mount the temperature transducers onto pipes.

3.02 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Test and calibrate in place the equipment to demonstrate that it meets the accuracy requirements for the full range as specified herein. Provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for the tests, including electric power and water required for tests. The Contracting Officer/Engineer will witness all field tests and conduct all field inspections. The Contractor shall give the Contracting Officer/Engineer ample notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests. Rectify any deficiencies found and retest work affected by such deficiencies at the Contractor's expense. Record data from each field test shall be recorded and documented in a formal field test report.

B. INSTRUMENTATION SCHEDULE


Instrumentation with construction, features, software and hardware as specified previously, shall be provided to monitor and control at the specified locations:

TAG LOCATION/SERVICE SIZE/TYPE CAL. RANGE

NOTES

FIT/FE- 521

RAS Flow Pump #1 10” Magnetic Flow Meter

0 – 5MGD Provide Gnding rings, ground fault detection

FIT/FE-522



FIT/FE- 523



FIT/FE-524



FIT/FE- 525



FIT/FE-526



FIT/FE- 527 RAS Flow Pump #7

10” Magnetic Flow Meter


FIT/FE-528



END OF SECTION